JP6750893B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, the variable display game is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins the start opening provided in the game area (start winning), and the special game is performed based on the result of the variable display game being a special result. Generate a condition. In addition, the probability of a special result can be set to either a low-probability state or a high-probability state, and one set from the occurrence of a special result in the low-probability state to the occurrence of a predetermined number of special results A gaming machine that sets a high probability state in a period is also known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-223632, A

However, in such a gaming machine, after a special result occurs in a low-probability state, a predetermined number of special results are promised to be derived. Therefore, in one set period, the game is just waiting for special results to be derived. It was not entertaining. An object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
Probability setting means for setting the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result of the special results to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state. ,
The probability setting means,
In the period from the derivation of the first special result to the first derivation of the first special result in the low probability state until the derivation number of the first special result reaches a predetermined number of times, the high probability To run the game in the state,
The effect control means,
Notifying the number of times of derivation of the first special result or the number of remaining times until reaching the predetermined number of times, and based on the predetermined number of times of the first special result from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state. It is possible to count the number of prize balls in a counting period which is a period from the end of the special game state to the derivation of the next first special result in the advantageous period which is the period until the special game state ends, characterized in that the are each capable broadcast information on the counting result prize balls number of a plurality of the counting period in advantageous period.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening-and-closing pattern of a special variation winning device. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining checksum calculation processing. It is a flow chart explaining initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flow chart explaining output processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining the winning number counter update processing. It is the flowchart which explains the production command setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number. It is a figure explaining the example in which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation alerting|reporting is performed. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check processing. It is a flow chart explaining pay-out busy signal check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port 1 switch process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure starting opening 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart explaining 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 transition process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 transition process shift setting process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a change in special figure 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/in-interval process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 small hit fanfare middle process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 small hit fanfare inside process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/during-interval processing. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 2 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening opening process. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit ending process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol variation control process. It is a flow chart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining magnet irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting port 1 signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining a symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variation production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit type command processing. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a figure explaining a decoration special result. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode of the decoration game in a low probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode of the decoration game in a high probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the decoration game in a specific execution mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the production at the time of a small hit occurrence in a low probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production at the time of a small hit occurrence in a high probability state. It is a figure explaining an example of a report in a report part. It is a flow chart explaining count production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining report information setting processing. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by a game point. It is a figure explaining the decoration special result in a 1st modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, the LED, etc., an abnormality notification color (for example, red color). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b are used to notify the content of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for alerting|reporting abnormalities in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, there is provided an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12. Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 to cause the ball-striking launch device to direct the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect of the player's operation intervening is displayed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is configured by being surrounded by a resin side case 33 and a guide rail 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 including a variable display device 4 having one of the board production devices 44 and rotatable reels 6a, 6b, 6c and a display device 41 is arranged. There is. The variable display device 4 and the display device 41 are mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the variable display device 4 and the display device 41, project forward from the variable display device 4 and the display device 41, and prevent the game ball from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32. ..

The variable display device 4 displays a decorative special figure variable display game in which the reels 6 are operated in response to the special figure variable display game to variably display a plurality of pieces of identification information and then stop displayed. The variable display device 4 can visually recognize the symbols variably displayed by the operation of the reel 6 from the symbol display window 5 (window portion). The reel 6 is composed of a cylindrical left reel 6a, a middle reel 6b, and a right reel 6c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. On the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 6a, 6b, 6c, a plurality of symbols (identification information) are arranged so as to be arranged along the circumferential direction. Further, each reel 6a, 6b, 6c is provided with a reel motor, which is a stepping motor, so that each reel 6a, 6b, 6c can be operated independently. That is, the reel motor serves as an electric drive source for driving the reels 6a, 6b, 6c.

By operating the reel 6 with the reel motor, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 5 are changed, for example, so as to circulate from top to bottom, or to fluctuate (fluctuation display). ). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 6 is stopped, for each reel 6a, 6b, 6c, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are displayed through the symbol display window 5. It is visible. That is, the effective display portion of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the decorative special figure variation display game can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 5. Therefore, the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c form a plurality of variable display portions that can display a plurality of symbols in a variable manner.

A predetermined effective line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 5. In this embodiment, each reel 6a, 6b, 6c upper line crossing the upper symbol, middle line crossing the middle symbol, lower line crossing the lower symbol, left reel 6a lower-middle reel 6b middle-right reel 6c upper stage A line diagonally crossing each reel 6a, 6b, 6c (upward right line), a line diagonally crossing each reel 6a, 6b, 6c from the left reel 6a upper stage-middle reel 6b middle stage-right reel 6c lower stage (right downward line). Is an effective line. The result is displayed by the symbol combination mode (rolled-out pattern) formed on this effective line.

Returning to FIG. 2, the display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 for effecting the game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41. Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a first notification unit 72a, a second notification unit 72b, a third notification unit 72c, and a fourth notification unit 72d are provided as notification units 72 including LEDs that can emit light of a plurality of colors. It is equipped. The informing unit 72 has a function of informing the number of times of special result derivation during the advantageous period described later in which the player can obtain a large number of award balls, and is acquired from the end of the special game state to the derivation of the next special result. It has a function of notifying information on the number of prize balls, and is adapted to notify such information by the light emitting mode of the LED.

In the upper left portion of the center case 40, a point notification unit 73 is provided to notify the game points given by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game. The point notification unit 73 includes four display units of 10,000 points, 5000 points, 1000 points, and 100 points, each of which is provided with an LED. When notifying the game points to be given, each display unit is sequentially turned on like a roulette wheel and then the corresponding display unit is turned on. FIG. 2 shows that 100 points have been awarded.

Further, in the lower left part of the center case 40, a cumulative value notification unit 74 that indicates the cumulative value of the game points acquired in a predetermined period is provided. Further, above the cumulative value notification unit 74, an expectation notification unit 75 is provided to notify the expectation that the special figure variation display game will be a big hit with the acquired game points. The expectation notification section 75 is provided with five light emitting sections, and the light emitting sections are turned on according to the game points acquired in a predetermined period, and the higher the number of turned on, the higher the degree of expectation.

Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 7).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first starting winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7). Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second starting winning opening 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7).

At the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a gate 34 for providing a start condition of a special game state is provided, and a gate switch 34a capable of detecting a game ball passing therethrough is provided at the gate 34. .. The special game state is started when the game ball passes through the gate 34 after the special result which is a big hit in the special figure variation display game is derived. Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, it is possible to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 1 special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 38 is provided.

The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c which can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, and is a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state in which the upper special winning opening is closed (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) is changed to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, a big winning hole which is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 38c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device, and a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on the above, by converting the upper special winning opening from the closed state to the open state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the upper special winning opening, and to give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is added.

Inside the upper special winning opening (winning area), a upper special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper special winning opening. There is. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game balls flowing into the upper special winning opening are detected by any upper special winning opening switch 38a. By providing a plurality of upper special winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flown into the upper special winning opening.

Immediately below the first start winning opening 36, a second special variation winning device (lower major winning opening) 39 capable of converting a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is provided. Has been done. The second special variation winning device 39 is provided with an opening/closing door 39c that can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in.

The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker type opening/closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, and is a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower special winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 39c driven by a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device, and a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on, the lower special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the lower special winning opening, and to give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is added.

Inside the lower special winning opening (winning area), a lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. .. Further, below the second special variation winning device 39, there is provided an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 2, a second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38. In this case, it may be completely overlapped vertically, or may be shifted left and right so that only part thereof is vertically overlapped. Further, the opening/closing doors 38c, 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and a slide type capable of opening the special winning opening by slidingly moving a plate-shaped member capable of closing the special winning opening, etc. The format is also good.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player can aim the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 by adjusting the launching force to shoot the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), and shoot the game ball to the right side game area. By hitting (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for winning in the second start winning hole 37 and the first special variation winning device 38. The second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed at by shooting the game ball to either the left or right game area.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game sphere is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since at least the front surface material of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game sphere passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, A game ball that passes through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball that flows down in the right-side game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which form the special figure variable display game, and a group of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure change display portion) 51 and special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 variation display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like. The game includes a special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display section) 52 and a storage display section 54 for informing the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variation display game which is composed of an LED lamp.

In addition, on the collective display device 50, a round display portion 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is opened and closed), left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. The first game state display unit 56 for notifying the player of the beating that is advantageous to the player (the one corresponding to the game state), and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. A probability display unit 57 is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50, a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the big hit is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a display that lights up when the big hit occurs and notifies the big hit occurrence A part (display) or the like may be provided. Furthermore, a general-purpose variable display game is executed like a conventional gaming machine, and a second starting winning opening is formed in which a game ball can be won based on the general-purpose variable display game having a specific result. When equipped with a variable prize winning device, a public figure display section that displays a general figure variable display game, a memory display section for informing the number of starting memory of the general figure variable display game, and a short time state that lights up when a short time state occurs A time saving state notification unit or the like may be provided for notifying the user.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments is also driven to blink. It is configured such that the fact that it is fluctuating is displayed so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. Then, when the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (in addition to the special case 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The memory display unit 54 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of unexploited balls (starting memory number=holding number) among the number of winning balls into the first starting winning port 36, which is a condition for starting variation of the special map 1 display 51. , It lights up (flashes) and is displayed. The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display device.

In the first game state display unit 56, for example, when the left-handed state is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed state (a normal state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the right-handed state is the right-handed state. If the player is in a more advantageous game state (right hitting), all LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all the LEDs when the big hit probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and turns all the LEDs off when the big hit probability state is a high probability state (probability change state). To turn on.

FIG. 3 shows the probability of a big hit and a small hit, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

The big hit probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probability in the normal game state that is a low probability state and the specific game state that is a high probability state are respectively The probability is as shown in 3(a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special result is derived in the low probability state for the first time, and in the period until the number of times the first special result is derived is 5, the high probability state is set after the special game state ends. Is configured to. The low-probability state is set after the fifth special game state based on the first special result ends. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Further, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not overlapped and won.

Further, FIG. 3(c) shows the types of big hits that can be selected in special figure 1 and special figure 2, the special variation winning device and the distribution probability that are opened in each big hit type, and FIG. FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 show the types of small hits that can be selected, the special variable winning device that is opened in each small hit type, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the distribution probability. The small hit 2 can be derived from either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the small hit may be set only in the special figure 2 instead of being provided in the special figure 1.

4 and 5 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 4A shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is off in the low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim at the first start winning port 36 by winning left and to aim at the second starting winning port 37 by hitting right. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed depending on the intention of the player. In addition, depending on the game state, the game is designed assuming that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured that it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game mainly in the one special figure variation display game which is determined to be the main one in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the low probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed as the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed as the irregular variation. In order to allow the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for the special figure 2, no matter which fluctuation pattern is selected, the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special display 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special FIG. 1 variable display game, but in the case of a small hit, which is a result of an outlier, or a small hit described later, the change time is set to a long time, so that the special probability is small. The execution of the variable display game shown in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in terms of time, and the player is made to mainly play the variable display game of the special figure 1 in the low probability state.

FIG. 4B shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is out of order in the high probability state. In this case only one variation pattern is selected. In this high-probability state, contrary to the above-described low-probability state, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed as the main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed as the irregular variation.

Here, the variation time in the case of a deviation result in the special figure 1 variation display game that is irregular variation in the high probability state is the variation time in the case of the special figure 2 variation display game that is irregular variation in the low probability state Is set shorter than the variation time (see FIG. 4A). This is because, as will be described later, a short time is set as the variation time when the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit or a small hit in a high probability state.

In other words, in the high probability state in which the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and can be executed efficiently in time, the special figure 1 variable display game with a low probability of a small hit is clearly disadvantageous, It is possible to allow the player to mainly play the special figure 2 variable display game without setting a long variable time. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an unnecessarily long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, but when it is executed simultaneously with the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly used. In order to allow the game to proceed, the variation time is sufficiently longer than the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

FIG. 5A shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a low probability state. With regard to Toku-zu 2, only fluctuation patterns that do not cause the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the variation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit may be longer than the selectable variation time when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. FIG. 5B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a high probability state. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

In particular, for the special figure 1 variable display game, a short variation time is selected when comparing the variation times that can be selected when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. This increases the possibility that the Toku-zu 1 variable display game, which has irregular fluctuations even in a high probability state, will stop before the Toku-zu 2 variable display game, which is the main fluctuation. However, there is a low possibility that the result will be forcibly changed. In addition, although the distribution of the variation pattern in FIG. 2 is performed by the type of big hit described above, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

FIG. 5C shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the low probability state. For Toku-zu 2, a long variation is selected in which a reach state is not generated and a variation time of about 10 minutes is set. FIG. 5D shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the high probability state. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected. In addition, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the time is set to be the same as in the case of the outlier in the high-probability state. It's enough time to be seen. In the high probability state, the variation time when the special figure 1 variable display game is out or a small hit is sufficient as long as it is forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. , It may be shorter than the time shown here.

FIG. 6 shows a special variation winning device in a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result). The open/close pattern of When the big hit type is 16R big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the upper special winning opening opening/closing pattern 1. In the first prize opening/closing pattern 1, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R) after the fanfare period of 5000 ms. After that, the round in which the interval period of 2000 ms and the open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special game state ends. Further, when the big hit type is 10R big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the upper special winning opening opening/closing pattern 2. This opening/closing pattern is different from the opening/closing pattern for the 16R jackpot only in the number of rounds.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening/closing pattern is the time obtained by adding the remaining sphere processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special winning opening/closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time, and 600 ms in the latter half is the interval time. In addition, the ending period in the upper special winning opening/closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time, and 9600 ms in the latter half is the ending time.

The opening and closing patterns for small hits are the fanfare period, opening period, interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure. The device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. Further, in both the big hit and the small hit opening/closing patterns, when a prescribed number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time. The opening time for small hits is shorter than the opening time for big hits, and the number of prizes awarded to the special variable prize device in the special game state is small. Therefore, the small hit has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the big hit. That is, in the special result, a first special result (big hit) capable of generating the first special game state and a second special game state having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state are generated. The second possible special result (small hit) is included.

The opening and closing pattern of the small hit is different in length of the fanfare period and the ending period depending on whether it is in the specific game state or not, and is longer in the specific game state. As will be described later, in the specific game state, since effects such as notification about small hits and notification of the number of prize balls due to winning are performed, these times are secured. In addition, small hits frequently occur in the specific game state, so by extending the fanfare period and ending period, it takes longer to complete the special game state and the number of prize balls per unit time should not be too large. There is. Further, the opening time of the special variation winning device is the same regardless of whether it is in the specific game state. Here, in the opening/closing pattern for each small hit, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to open a plurality of times. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variation winning device is the same regardless of whether it is in the specific game state or not.

Although the fanfare period and the ending period are both different in length depending on whether or not they are in the specific game state, only one of them may be different. Also, with regard to the opening/closing pattern of the big hit, one or both of the length of the fanfare period and the ending period may be made different depending on whether or not it is in the specific game state.

In the following description, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simply referred to as the special figure variable display game, when they are not distinguished from each other. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Moreover, when the first special game state, which is a special game state based on the big hit, and the second special game state, which is a special game state based on the small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward a game area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or flow into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and discharge from the game area 32. To be done. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, the type of the winning opening won. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as the starting winning balls of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided inside, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 Is stored as a limit. When the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36 in the state where the variable display game can be started and the first starting memory number is 0, the first starting memory is generated along with the generation of the starting right. Is stored and the first starting memory number is incremented by 1, and at the same time, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first starting memory, and at this time, the first starting memory number is decremented by 1. .. On the other hand, a state where the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, a state where the special figure 1 variable display game has already been executed and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state In addition, when a game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36, if the first starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first starting memory number is incremented by 1 and one first starting memory is stored. .. Then, in a state where the first starting memory number is 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or special game state). The starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first starting memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. When the second start winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. In addition, a state where the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be immediately started, for example, a state where the special figure 2 variable display game has already been executed and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state In addition, the second starting memory does not occur even if the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 37. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if the second start winning opening 37 is won, the second start memory is temporarily generated for the convenience of the process. The second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur because it is immediately consumed.

In addition, when the start winning prize ball is detected, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random number values are in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 7). Is stored in the special figure storage area (part of RAM) as a special figure starting memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first starting memory). Then, the stored number of the special figure starting memory is displayed on the memory display unit 54 (special figure 1 reserved display) for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decorative special figure starting memory display.

The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variable display device) based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory, and the second starting. Based on the winning in the winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is played on the special figure 2 display device 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one of the special figure variable display games is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). When it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (outcome result).

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 is the special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and the first special game state (so-called big hit state) is reached based on the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7). When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode (the small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed on the variable display device 4 and the display device 41. The decorative special figure variable display game is executed. The decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decoration special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variable display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the variable display device 4 and the display device 41 variably display the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It constitutes a decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. Further, the gaming machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the normal game state that is a low probability state, the variation time is the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variations are selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win the small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit left and aim at the first start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game. The time for long fluctuation is set to about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

When a big hit occurs and a special game state is entered, it is possible to aim at the first special variation winning device 38 by right-handing. In addition, when the second special variation winning device 39 is opened in a special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to aim at right hitting or left hitting. After the special game state based on the big hit, the specific game state, which is a high-probability state, may occur. In this particular game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, so it is advantageous for the player to perform a special figure 2 variable display game by hitting the right and aiming for the second starting winning opening 37. Becomes In the specific game state, the special variation winning device based on the small hit and the special variation winning device based on the big hit are frequently opened, and the player can obtain a large amount of game balls.

From the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37), and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is played. In the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state that is advantageous to a person, a game control unit (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and a special variation winning device (first special variation winning prize) that is opened in the special gaming state. The device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39) are provided, and the game control means is a fanfare period which is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening the special variation winning device, and the last in the special gaming state. It is possible to set an ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening of the special variation winning device to the end of the special game state, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, the special result is It is possible to change the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in accordance with the game state when derived. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the first variation display game is executed on the basis of the first starting winning opening 36 forming the starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening 37 forming the starting winning opening, and the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36. A first variable display game execution control unit (game control device 100) and a second variable display game execution control unit (game control device) that executes a second variable display game based on winning of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 37. 100) and a specific game state generation means (game control device 100) capable of generating a specific game state in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state, the game control means , When one or both of the fanfare period and ending period in the special game state based on the same special result, the special result is derived more than when the game state when the special result is derived is not the specific game state When the game state of is a specific game state, it is made longer. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, in the specific game state, it is possible to secure time to execute the effect, and when not in the specific game state, the game can be rapidly advanced.

Further, the special result includes a first special result in which the probability of being derived according to the game state can be changed, and a second special result in which the probability of being derived is constant regardless of the game state, The probability of deriving the second special result is set to be higher than the probability of deriving the first special result. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by setting the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period for the second special result in which the probability is not changed, the derivation probability does not change, but the execution mode can be changed.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having the same, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 has a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC 32V from an AC power supply of 24V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a voltage of DC 32V. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that informs the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure occurrence when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is achieved, some of the plurality of display results have already been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same It is also possible to set the state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) to the reach state and to display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect with a different possibility of deriving the special result mode (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). Random pattern generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure variable display game And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result (big hit, small hit or out) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, Any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation allocation information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 in the second starting winning opening 37. The switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, a plurality of (1 to x, two in the present embodiment) upper special winning opening switches 38a and the second special variation winning apparatus 39 arranged in the first special variation winning apparatus 38. It is connected to the lower special winning opening switch 39a and the gate switch 34a in the gate 34, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic of 0V-5V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for converting into a signal of is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In the output of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, the lower winning opening switch 39a, and the gate switch 34a are the first. 2 is input to the input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 as well as the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 and asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in a signal based on) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for informing the test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of the special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a big hit through the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test firing test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is also connected to the data bus 140 to open and close the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting is output. Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signals of the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal of a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device is output to the external information terminal board 71. Four drivers 138d are provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, lower winning a prize mouth switch 39a, gate switch 34a is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. (Hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of the solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and the command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) To receive. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, the production control device 300 is provided with a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). .. The board decoration device 46 is provided with a point notification unit 73, a cumulative value notification unit 74, and an expectation level notification unit 75 that perform an effect related to game points, and a notification during an advantageous period described below in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. An informing unit 72 for performing is also included.

Further, in the effect control device 300, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the glass frame 15, a game board 30 ( A panel effect mover for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, the variable display device 4 or a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) provided in the center case 40). A body control circuit 334 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. In addition, even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. good.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. That detects the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect a signal and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct-current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to. Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, the jackpot determination random number etc. of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The big hit determination random number value or the like in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hitting or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning opening 37, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game and the like are extracted and stored in the RAM 111C. Remember the starting memory. The big hit determination random number value or the like in the second starting memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and processing for determining the hitting or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. The start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game described above. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control apparatus 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). Make a means.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the variable display device 4 or the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 and the special game when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. Perform processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111A enables the opening and closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 to be opened by the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game balls to flow into the upper special winning opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening/closing door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 is opened by the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the lower special winning opening.

Then, the special winning opening is won until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won in the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. The opening is defined as one round, and the control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the low-probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 performed at a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a top address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is set. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the leading 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and the power-on delay timer is set (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the lapse of the waiting time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting the lapse of the waiting time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on to the lapse of the waiting time. Need to continue. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process (step X7) of setting the power-on delay timer, the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown have been retained, so backup processing will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step X12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has expired, access is permitted to the read/write RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step X13). ), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read in advance. Then, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step X17), and the normal operation is performed. If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 10 and the process for normal recovery from a power failure is performed.

In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y) or when the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

In step X21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been finalized. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed.

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X22), and the step Go to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the customer is waiting. Send the command on the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command on the recovery screen. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is an area related to the customer waiting demonstration area and the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a sound and a sound are output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Then, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

In step X28, processing for activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit transposed pattern of the hard random number (here, the big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special drawing). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X30), interruption is permitted (step X31). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt process which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle. Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed every time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step X32, the number of times (for example, 2) to check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step X33), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X32). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number updating process (step X32), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step X32 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the value random number updating process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34). Further, if the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily interrupting (step X36) is performed. A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X41), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42). ), wait until the power to the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) which can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section being operated. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 11 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation processing, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start address of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step X53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and the checksum is calculated. It is determined whether the calculation of is completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57:N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step X57:Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 12 shows the initial value random number updating process (step X32) in the above-mentioned main process. In the initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number updating process is ended. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure variable display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variable display game. It is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper special winning opening solenoid 38b, lower special winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 of the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the launch permission state seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 by various processes, a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) are performed. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper special winning opening switch 38a, and the lower special winning opening switch 39a, and error monitoring. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X108) for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is performed.

Next, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Then, a special figure 1 game process (step X110) for performing a special figure 1 variable display game process and a special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing a special figure 2 variable display game process are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio irregularity for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality The monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt-disabled state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X126), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and the switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

Then, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X131), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), the switch reading process (step X133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

In the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory.
Further, as the information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, the information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken in by the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. It is saved (stored) in (step X144). After that, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (step X145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the second reading of the state of the signal input to the target input port is performed (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is set. It is saved (stored) in (step X149). After that, a deterministic bit pattern is created by setting the bit having the same state as 1 and the bit having different state as 0 in the first and second readings (step X150), and the logical product of the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 is obtained. The determined bit is set (step X151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 0 and the bit having a different state is 0 is created in the first read and the second read (step X152), and the logic of the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interruption is created. The product is obtained and set as the previously held bit (step X153). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch is removed. Then, the present confirmed bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the present confirmed state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and present confirmed states is taken, and the result is saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reads the switch once for each interrupt processing and compares it with the previous read result to change the signal. Although there is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, if it does so, there is a possibility that the correct determination cannot be made when the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the time of the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the output processing, first, off-data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting the data of the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b are combined and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step X163). X164), and the acquired information and external information data are combined (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data and the output data of the permission of launch are combined (step X170), and the combined data is output for external information. The data is output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shot test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmitting process (step X105) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the payout command transmission process, it is first checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor illegal payouts by comparing these two signals.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 15 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. It should be noted that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step X181), “0” is set in the prize number counter area to be checked among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not Then, if there is no count number (step X181:N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of all the winning number counter areas has been completed. (Step X183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184) to obtain the target winning number counter. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls is added to the obtained number of payouts to obtain a new remaining number of prize balls (step X186), and the result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls region (step X187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, a predetermined number of 10, which is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal, is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the result of the subtraction is not saved in the remaining prize ball area, the value before the subtraction is stored in the remaining prize ball area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining prize ball area (step X191). , And returns to step X188.

As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact value generated during the big hit. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.

In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). When the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The pay-out busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the pay-out control device 200 can immediately start the pay-out control. When the pay-out control cannot be started immediately, the pay-out busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process when the power is turned on. The indefinite state is set to the idle state or the busy state based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to a state indicating that the payout control can be immediately started or disabled. To resolve. That is, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is recovered, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period without being transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

When the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmitting process is ended. It should be noted that here, even in the case of an indefinite state, it is determined that it is busy. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform wasteful processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

When the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), "0" is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

Then, when there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are checked. It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmitting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), the payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the obtained command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission processing is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is formed.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs due to some cause, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, a function for backing up is required, which causes a problem of cost increase. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

In addition, the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, so the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38. , A second special variation winning device 39) based on the winning of the game ball to the game ball, the game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command, and based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, a game The payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the ball is provided, and the game control means is a status signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. A status signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control when a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means based on the (busy signal) and a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Even if is output, the prize signal is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the payout control means continuously outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period. Accordingly, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, in the game area 32, a winning area having a different number of prize balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning apparatus 38, second special variation winning apparatus 39) is provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) can specify, for each number of prize balls, whether or not the prize ball command for instructing the payout control of the game balls has not been transmitted (game control device 100). And the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The payout control means determines whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control before the award ball command counter determines whether or not there is an untransmitted prize ball command. I am going to do it.

In addition, the game control is performed comprehensively, and a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning apparatus 38, second special variation winning apparatus 39). ) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball, and a payout control for performing a game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. With the means (payout control device 200), the game control means can start the payout control by a status signal output from the payout control means, which indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. In the case of indicating that, the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area. External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information about the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is output from the payout control means. The signal outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period, and a prize ball command is issued. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). The ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , The first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39), the prize ball command is generated in units of one winning, and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command of the above to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize information is given in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. It is possible to memorize, and update the game ball in the predetermined prize area at the time of winning, and by updating in response to the transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means, the prize ball command that has not been transmitted. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the game balls into the predetermined prize area, and outputs the prize ball signal every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the prize ball signal counter can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and the prize of the game ball in the predetermined prize area. It is possible to store the number of prize balls that has not been subjected to the accumulation process by updating the data at the same time and updating it in correspondence with the accumulation process of the prize balls by the external information output means.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 18 shows the random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start value) of the big hit symbol random numbers and the small hit symbol random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). In addition, when the big hit design random number is waiting for initial value setting (step X221; Y), the big hit design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit design random number is handled. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in the register (start value setting register) (step X223). Then, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

When the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. In addition, when the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hitting symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial of the loaded small hitting symbol random number. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 19 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number updating process 2 updates both of them. The update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the upper byte and the lower byte are updated at different interrupt times. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Is configured.

In this random number updating process 2, first, a random number updating scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the subject of this updating process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). Randomness can be given to the random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). Then, when the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, The value is set to the mask update value obtained by adding "1" to the masked value), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" as the additional value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step (X238), the process proceeds to step X239. It should be noted that the reason why "1" is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). , And proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step X241) and the process proceeds to step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). When the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is set as the new random number value again (step X244), and this value is set to 1 The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), the new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the higher random number area of the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), and the random number update process 2 ends.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A, among the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 20 shows a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). In this winning opening switch/state monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper winning opening switch 38a in the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). , The fraud & prize monitoring process (step X302) is executed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal prize in the special winning opening even though the special winning opening is not open, and detect a normal winning.

In the prize-winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of the illegality monitoring information, a lower address of the illegal prize number area, and an illegal prize error. The information of the notification command, the upper limit of the number of fraudulent prizes (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. These fraud monitoring table and winning table are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning a prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning a prize opening switch 39a in the lower award winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and the illegal winning is monitored. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step X304) of detecting a normal prize is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step X305), and the number of winnings is set. The winning number counter updating process (step X306) for updating is performed. Then, the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is planned to be executed is performed (step X307).

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step X310) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of the disconnection of the switch connector or the like. When the value is set and the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status is set based on the shoot out ball switch signal from the payout control device 200. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step X312) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch, and the state scan When the counter value is 1, the state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X313), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and the gaming machine status check is performed to determine the status such as whether an error has occurred. The process (step X315) is performed.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step X316) that sets a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. To do. Since the processing of steps X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, it is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of steps X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 21 shows the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the above-described winning a prize switch/state monitoring process. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is a process performed for each of the two upper special winning opening switches 38a of the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39. With regard to the special winning opening (special variation winning devices 38, 39), it is easy to perform fraudulently forcibly opening the opening/closing door to insert the game ball and paying out the prize ball. ..

In the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning a prize switch targeted for error monitoring is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch for error monitoring is the upper special winning port switch 38a, and the winning port for error monitoring When the switch is the lower special winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened.

When it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal prizes after addition is determined as the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, the monitoring target). It is determined whether the number exceeds 5 (step X325).

The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is in the effective period of the big winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when a prize is passed after passing or when there is noise on a signal, and to not easily determine an error even if it is not illegal.

When the number of judgments is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of judgments exceeds the number (step X325; Y), the number of illegal prizes is kept at the number of illegal occurrence judgments (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60000ms) is saved in the target illegal prize notification timer area (step S326). X327). Next, the target fraud command is prepared (step X328), the fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not in the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning prize port monitoring table of the target winning prize switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting the prize ball is performed. .. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether the notification timer update is permitted (step X333). Then, if the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), -1 is updated if the target notification timer is not 0 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch of the error monitoring target is one upper special winning port switch 38a, and is permitted when the winning port switch of the error monitoring target is the other upper special winning port switch 38a. Not done. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as often with regard to the injustice notification of the first special variation winning device 38, and prevents the time from being increased by half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). .. In addition, when the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning prize switch 39a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step X336) and the fraud prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & winning award monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( (Step X339), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value in the fraud flag area (step X340).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step X340; Y), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an incorrect prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update processing]
FIG. 22 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps X306, X331) in the above-described winning port switch/state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In the prize number counter updating process, first, the number of the winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port switch table of the winning port monitoring table (step X351) and input to the target winning port switch (to be exact, change of input). ) Is determined (step X352).

If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). If an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). If an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is completed. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
FIG. 23 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above fraud & prize monitoring process. The effect command setting process is common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

When the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written in the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). , It is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

When the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written in the production serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the production command setting process ends.

In this way, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and the command analysis can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the load can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 Abnormal variation monitoring processing]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring processing (step X307) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the low-probability normal game state, but a player who does not know this Alternatively, a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game may right-hand strike. In the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process, a process for giving a notification prompting such a player to perform left-handed play is performed.

It should be noted that the abnormal variation here means irregular variation which is a main special figure variation display game. Since it is possible to win the second start winning port 37 even in the normal game state, it is a valid special figure fluctuation display game even with irregular fluctuations. Use of a game ball with a thread or a magnet, radio wave It is different from an illegal act of illegally detecting a prize by launching a game and executing a special figure variation display game. However, it is not desirable that the special character variation display game, which is the main feature of the game machine design, be continued to be executed.Here, such irregular variation is detected. The number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations is counted, and when the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations reaches a specified value, a corresponding process is performed. Of course, the special figure 2 variation display game in which irregular variation is detected by illegally detecting a prize at the second start winning port 37 due to the use of a game ball or magnet with a thread, emission of radio waves, etc. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is counted. In other words, the number of abnormal fluctuations in special figure 2 is counted when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that causes irregular fluctuations is executed regardless of whether or not it is an illegal act.

In the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 change check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a low probability state. When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X381; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). When there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is incremented by 1 (step X383).

Then, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 is smaller than a specified value (for example, 18) (step X384). The determination is made (step X387). If it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number added by the special figure 2 variable display game being executed in the normal game state (low probability state) must be 0. For example, -1 is updated (step X385), the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether there is a special check 2 variation check flag (step X387). The minimum value of the number of abnormal fluctuations in special figure 2 is set to 0.

The special figure 2 check flag is a flag set when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a low probability state. When it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387), if the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X387; N), the process proceeds to step X390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 variation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by +1 (step X389). 2 It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

That is, the special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a variation display game (irregular variation) which is not the main in the low probability state, and the special figure 2 check flag is set. Based on this, the Toku-zu 2 abnormal variation number, which is the abnormality determination number, is updated (added here) in the abnormal direction. In addition, the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 that is the number of abnormal cancellations is updated (added here) based on the start of the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation), and the number of abnormal judgments is based on the fact that the number of abnormal cancellations satisfies a predetermined condition. The special figure 2 which forms the number of abnormal fluctuations is updated (subtracted here) in the abnormal canceling direction. Therefore, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality determination number management unit that updates the abnormality determination number in the abnormality occurrence direction based on the start of a non-mainly variable display game.

When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to the specified value-1 (step X391), and the initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, even though the player is in the normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to advance the game mainly by the special display 1 variable display game by striking the left side, FIG. 2 shows a case where the variable display game is being executed, and processing for giving a notification prompting the player to make a left hit is performed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time has not expired (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process ends. When the time is up (step X396; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag is prepared (step X397), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step X398).

Then, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step X399). Then, when the prepared flag and the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area are the same (step X399; Y), that is, when there is no change in the state, the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared flag is not the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step X399; N), that is, if the state has changed, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal variation release flag. Is determined (step X400).

If the prepared flag is not the Toku-zu 2 abnormal change release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the Toku-zu 2 abnormal change occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the Toku-zu 2 abnormal change flag area (step X402), effect command setting processing is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring processing is ended. On the other hand, when the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag (step X400; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), and then the processes of steps X402 and X403 are performed. (Step X403), the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing is ended. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal change, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is issued in accordance with the cancellation of the special figure 2 abnormal change. It is transmitted to 300 and the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormality change notification are set.

FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 show an example of the process of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 and the special figure 1 variation number is 15 in the normal game state. When the next Toku-zu 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the Toku-zu 1 variation number changes from 15 to 16. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t12), the number of abnormal fluctuations of the special figure 2 changes from 3 to 4.

After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the number of variations of the special figure 1 is updated by +1 (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches 18 which is the specified value (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0. It Similarly thereafter, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches the prescribed value 18, (t17), Special figure 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is updated by -1 and changes from 3 to 2, and the number of special figure 1 fluctuations is cleared to 0. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted every time the prescribed number (here, 18 times) of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

FIG. 26 shows the case where the special figure 2 abnormality change notification is performed. In this example, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 number of abnormal fluctuations is 3. When the special figure 2 variation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches 5, which is a prescribed value.

As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the output of the gaming machine error status signal to the device outside the gaming machine are started, It becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the abnormal change of special figure 2 by the management device of the amusement store. Further, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 gives a notification by display or voice that the special figure 2 abnormality has occurred. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 form a corresponding means for performing a predetermined response based on the abnormality determination number (the special figure 2 abnormality variation number) satisfying a predetermined condition (being a specified value).

Further, when the Toku-zu 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer reaches the specified value of 5, the timer of the Toku-zu 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer starts (t22), and a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t23), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Moreover, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred.

The special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to the prescribed value -1 (here 4) after it is determined that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred and the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is newly started before the elapse of the predetermined time, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 becomes the specified value, and the timing of the predetermined time is newly started from that point. As a result, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed despite the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has been informed, the notification period is extended accordingly.

In this way, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred based on the number of special figure 2 abnormal changes reaching a specified value (for example, 5), for example, a game ball enters the game area on the right side unintentionally. Therefore, it is possible to prevent that the special variation of the special figure 2 is immediately determined when the second start winning opening 37 is won. In addition, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted by playing the special figure 1 variation display game a predetermined number of times, so that the special figure 2 abnormal variation that occurs due to the unintended winning of the second starting winning opening 37 The number will be canceled if the player is playing a game after that, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake and a cumulative result of the games of other players from being determined to be the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number for which special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification and the specified value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number for performing processing for subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrarily set. It can be set. Each specified value set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored, monitoring should be restarted from the state before the power failure occurred. Further, even when the special map 2 abnormal variation notification is performed, the payout of the prize balls for the winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 27 shows the gaming machine status check processing (steps X310, X312, and X315) in the above-described winning opening switch/status monitoring processing. In this gaming machine status check processing, first, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and the signal. ON determination data, status off command (error notification end command in case of error system), status on command (error notification start command in case of error system), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

When the target signal is not ON (step X452:N), the state OFF flag is prepared as the state flag (step X453), and the target state OFF command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is not ON (step X452: N), it means that the error system signal indicates no error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is ON (step X452: Y), the state ON flag is prepared as the state flag (step X456), and the target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step X457). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), it means that the error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and the signal from the touch switch is touching. Is a state indicating.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step X459; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). , It is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step X459; N), that is, when the signal status changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X461). Step X463).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463:Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the comparison value -1 (step X464) and prepared. The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is executed. After that (step X467), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 28 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step X316) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is ON (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474) and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). ..

After that, it is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region is the same as the current signal state, that is, whether there is an on/off change (step X476). If they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step X480).
When the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check processing is ended. If the signal confirmation time has been reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set to -1. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X482), and the payout busy signal check processing is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time, It is hard to be affected by such as.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the signal fixing time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information regarding the winning of the starting opening set when the jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X493).

If the information regarding the existence of the starting opening winning combination is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no winning of the starting opening is set. On the other hand, when the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether there is a low probability (step X494). If the probability is low (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-stroke instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting information on the hold by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497), and special figure starting opening 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handing instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 gives a right-handing instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed stroke by display or voice. In the high probability state, right-handed is more advantageous to the player, and if the player does not win the game unless left-handed, the first starting winning opening 36 detects a prize in the high-probability state. The right-handing instruction is informed.

Next, the winning opening 2 (second starting winning opening 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X500), and a big hit random number is generated based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37. It is determined whether or not there is the information regarding the winning of the starting mouth which is set when it is acquired (step X501).

When the information regarding the existence of the starting opening winning combination is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no winning of the starting opening is set. On the other hand, when the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether there is a high probability (step X502). If the probability is high (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the probability is not high (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not it is during the big hit, that is, the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit (step X503).

If it is a big hit (step X503; Y), the process moves to step X507. If the jackpot is not in progress (step X503; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting information on the hold by the starting port 2 is prepared (step X507), a special figure starting port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

Based on the reception of the left-handing instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 gives a left-handing instruction notification that instructs the player to perform left-handing by display or voice. In the low probability state, left-handedness is more advantageous to the player, and if the right-handedness is not achieved, the second starting winning opening 37 is designed not to win the prize. The left-handed instruction is informed. Since the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first special game state, the left hitting instruction is not notified even in the low probability state.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 30 shows the hard random number acquisition process (steps X492, X500) in the above-described starting opening switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition processing, first, the information regarding no starting mouth winning is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

When there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514; Y), the jackpot random number extracted to the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

[Special figure start opening 1 switch processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure starting port 1 switch process (step X498) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. In the special figure starting port 1 switch processing, first, the starting port signal 1 output count, which is the number of times the information about the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. Then (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step X523). If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold count (first start storage count) is set. Is less than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, the value is not saved because the value is updated to +1 and loops to 0.

When the number of special figure 1 reservations is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of variation patterns is set in the special figure reservation information determination process described later ( (Step X526), the special figure 1 reservation number is incremented by 1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition processing is the big hit random number of RWM. Save in the storage area (step X529).

Then, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Furthermore, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, a special figure reservation information determination process (step X534) which is a prefetch process is performed, a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step X535), and a production command setting process is performed ( (Step X536), and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing ends. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36, and store the predetermined random number as a first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It constitutes a first starting storage means.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure reservation information determination process (step X534) in the special figure starting port 1 switch process described above. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result-related information corresponding to the special figure 1 starting memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 starting memory. In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether the high probability state is in progress (step X541), and if it is in the high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. .. If it is not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit, that is, the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

When the big hit is in progress (step X542; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. When the big hit is not in progress (step X542; N), big hit judgment processing is executed to judge whether or not it is a big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (step X543). When the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546), A read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). Further, if the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing a read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) of setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed to set the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game. Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step X556), and finish the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in step X554 are the special figure 1 variation start processes of the special figure 1 normal process that are executed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. Is the same as.

By the above process, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 starting memory, and the information of the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 starting memory are included. A pre-reading variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 starting memory is changed to the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 starting memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 prior to the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game starts. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result and variation mode information of the first variable display game before the start of the first variable display game based on the first startup memory stored in the first startup storage means. It constitutes a possible first determining means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Determines whether or not) forms a pre-determination means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

It should be noted that this special figure suspension information determination processing is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate start memory for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done Further, the prefetching process is not performed when the probability is high. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game mainly plays a role during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly disengaged as a result is derived from this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because most of them are stopped at. That is, it is almost meaningless to inform the pre-reading result because it is out of order, and the notice is given because the pre-reading result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly changed to the out-of-effect result. This is because the contradiction may occur.

However, since the starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variation while the first start memory for the first period of the specific game state is provided. There is a high possibility that only the display game will be played, and in such a case, the look-ahead effect may be performed for the first starting memory. Among the first starting memories for performing such prefetching effect, the prefetching process is performed for the one that occurs before the start of the specific game state, so the result is used, and for the one that occurs after the start of the specific game state, The pre-reading process is performed for the target of such pre-reading effect. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined in another process whether to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure starting port 2 switch process (step X508) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. In the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, first, the number of times the starting port signal 2 is output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the second starting winning port 37 is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded. Then, (step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X563). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the starting number signal 2 output number area of the RWM (step X564), and the starting port 2 (the second starting winning port 37) is won. Determine if it is disabled.

Starting mouth 2 winning award invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game with a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during the special figure display process described later), the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. When the starting opening 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure starting opening 2 switch processing is ended. When the starting opening 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 reservation number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), save the jackpot random numbers prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the big hit symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Furthermore, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is ended. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a starting winning prize storing means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the second starting winning hole 37. The variation pattern random number 1 is not used in the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. Toku-zu 1 control of the entire process relating to the variable display game, and the display of Toku-zu 1 is set. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, during the big hit/small hit of the special figure 2, that is, during the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

When the big hit/small hit of special figure 2 is not done (step Y101; N), big winning opening switch supervisory processing is done (step Y102), -1 is updated if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y103). ). In addition, when the big hit/small hit of special figure 2 is in the midst (step Y101; Y), it moves to step Y103.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, game balls are played with the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Perform a process to monitor the detection. In the special figure 1 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display. For the special game state executed based on whether the result of the game is a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special FIG. 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119 to perform the subsequent processing. When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special sequence 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game and Fig. 1 Performs special process 1 usual process (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing the changing process. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process are specified. 1 During change processing (step Y109) is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform the fanfare/interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the big hit round is the final round, and the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and the special figure 1 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is "6" in step Y107, the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) that sets information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time/opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. A small hit fanfare middle process (step Y115) for setting information necessary for the above is performed. When the special figure 1 game process number is "8" at step Y107, a small hit mid-range process (step Y116) for setting an ending command and information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. To do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process, and the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y117) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. When the special figure 1 game process number is "10" in step Y107, the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed to obtain the special characteristics. The game process of FIG. 1 is terminated. This special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the above timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process is basically the same as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

In the special figure 2 game process, first, during the big hit/small hit of the special figure 1, that is, during the special game state executed based on whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. Is determined (step Y131). When the big hit/small hit of special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 ( Step Y133). In addition, when the big hit/small hit of special figure 1 is done (step Y131; Y), it moves to step Y133.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, game balls are played with the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Perform a process to monitor the detection. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on whether the game result is a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing from step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is a very long time. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here, 60000 ms).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game and the special effect are monitored. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) for setting the information necessary for performing the changing process is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process are specified. 2 The changing process (step Y140) is performed.

At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform the fanfare/interval processing (step Y142). At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "5", the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, and the special figure 2 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y138, the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y145) that sets information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. The small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the above is performed. When the special figure 2 game process number is "8" in step Y138, a small hit mid-range process (step Y147) is performed such as setting an ending command and information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process. To do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process, and the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step Y138, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed to obtain the special character. The game process of FIG. 2 is terminated. The special figure 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing is basically the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing with respect to special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
FIG. 36 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102, Y132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is open (step Y159). When the upper special winning opening is open (step Y159; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. When the upper special winning opening is not open (step Y159; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining large ball of the upper special winning opening is being processed (step Y160). The remaining ball processing in this determination includes both a big winning hole remaining ball processing based on a big hit and a small hit remaining ball processing based on a small hit.

When the remaining balls of the special winning opening are being processed (step Y160; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the remaining ball processing of the upper special winning opening is not being performed (step Y160; N), it is determined whether or not the lower special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is open (step Y161). When the lower special winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the lower special winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y162).

In addition, during the opening in steps Y159 and Y161, during the opening in the first special game state is a special game state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special game state based on the second special result (small hit) Including both during the opening in the second special game state. In addition, in the determination of steps Y159 to Y161, the determination may be made by referring to the special processing diagram 1 or the special processing diagram 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set is set. The determination may be made based on this flag.

When there is no input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y162; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y162; Y), 1 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening that is added in the present special winning opening switch monitoring processing. Then, (step Y163), a special winning opening count command is prepared in order to perform an effect by winning (step Y164), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175. In the case where there is remaining ball processing for the lower special winning opening, the special winning hole count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even when the lower special winning opening switch is input during the remaining ball processing. You can

On the other hand, when the upper special winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or the remaining balls of the upper special winning opening are being processed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0 in step Y166. Set (step Y166). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (one upper special winning opening switch 38a) (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

If there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared in order to produce an effect by winning (step Y168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y169). ). Further, the prize counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (the other upper special winning opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. Further, when there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared for performing an effect by winning (step Y172), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y173). ). Furthermore, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

After that, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), during the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y176; Y) or during the small hit remaining ball processing (step Y177; Y) In either case, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the special winning opening remaining ball is not being processed (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step Y177; N), the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is added to the special winning opening count number (step Y178), and it is determined whether or not the special winning opening count number is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (here, 9) (step Y179; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step Y179; Y), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (step Y180) and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot is being opened, that is, the first special game state, which is the special game state based on the jackpot, is opened (step Y182).

If the jackpot is not being opened (step Y182; N), that is, if the jackpot is being opened, the jackpot opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the jackpot is open (step Y182; Y), the jackpot opening operation end value is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (step Y183), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 2 variable display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to judge this here.

If the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal process ends. Further, when the special map 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). When the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handing instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). After that, the left-hand instruction command notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). The left hitting instruction notification flag is when the special game state based on the first special result for the fifth time counting from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state ends, that is, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. When the advantageous period ends, it is cleared, so that the left hitting instruction is informed when shifting to the normal game state in which the special figure variation display game is executed in the low probability state.

Then, if the number of reserved special maps 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 variation start processing for setting information on the special figure 1 variable display game and the like is performed (step Y210), and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Production command setting processing is performed (step Y212). It should be noted that at the time of performing the process (step Y210) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared.

Next, the change of special figure 1 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variable display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state where only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state where only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. There is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is the special game state based on the small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether the high probability state is in effect (step Y213). If the high probability state is in effect (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the high probability state is not in effect (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in the low probability state. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal processing ends.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 1 variable display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal process is ended. Further, if the special map 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second starting memory) is based on the winning when the second starting winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. This is generated temporarily for the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game like the first starting memory.

Then, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y224). After that, special figure 2 variation start processing for setting information regarding the special figure 2 variation display game and the like is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 variation in progress is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether the high probability state is in effect (step Y227). If the high probability state is in effect (step Y227; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the high probability state is not in effect (step Y227; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the low probability state. After that, special figure 2 mid-fluctuation process shift setting processing is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the number of reserved special maps 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special maps 1 are changing (step Y232). If the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233). If it is not disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Perform processing related to settings. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y231; N), when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y232; Y) or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y233; Y) , Step Y237.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y234), and the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

Further, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without the backup function loses the information on the game state, so that the proper production cannot be performed. By setting the waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change of the game state is transmitted. It will be possible to return to the production according to the game state earlier than waiting.

Further, with the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the probability state may change due to the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, it becomes possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the variation start probability information command every time the special figure variation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Therefore, it is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the production control device 300 to return to the production according to the game state when it is restarted.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal process described above. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step Y241), and deviation information is set as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting jackpot information or jackpot information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. 1 information setting processing (step Y244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the variation pattern setting of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. (Step Y245).

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game The process (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after this, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed simultaneously is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. It ends as a result. In particular, since there is a high probability of a small hit for the special figure 2 variable display game, such processing is likely to be performed for the special figure 1 variable display game when the special figure 2 variable display game stops first. .. Therefore, for example, even if a high-exposure effect is produced in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped as a result, and the player feels distrustful. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to be started, it is possible to prevent the production with high expectations from being selected or to change the special figure 2 variation. When the special result of the big hit is derived in the display game, a specific execution mode can be set for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game executed by the variable display device 4, or the like.

For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is in progress (step Y248), and if it is in the high probability state (step Y248; Y), the Toku-zu 1 variation start process is terminated. When it is in the high probability state, it is a state in which the game is advanced mainly by the special display 2 variable display game. In this state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and is executed at a high frequency, so it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game is likely to be forcibly stopped due to the deviation result. In the special figure 1 variable display game, special processing is not performed here because it is set in advance so that an effect with high expectation is not selected.

When the high probability state is not in effect (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). If the Toku-zu 2 is not changing (step Y249; N), the Toku-zu 1 change start process is ended. In this case, since it is in the low probability state, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a very long variation time. Therefore, since there is a low possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, no processing is performed here so as not to select an effect with high expectation.

If the Toku-zu 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether or not the result of the running Toku-zu 2 changing display game is off (Step Y250), and if the result is off (Step Y250; Y). ) Ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is not out of step (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the special figure 1 variation start process is ended. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so that an effect with high expectation is not selected. No processing is done.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variable display to be executed from now on. It is determined whether the variation time of the game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the special figure 1 variation start process is ended. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so no processing is performed to prevent the production with a high degree of expectation from being selected.

If the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), the fact that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer is notified. A command is prepared (step Y255), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y256), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended. This command also includes information indicating whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. In the effect control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the selection of the high-expectation effect for the special figure 1 variable display game is restricted or specified. Processing such as setting a mode is performed.

When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). You may make it perform the process which resets the information (variable pattern number of the former and latter half) about a variation pattern, and the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may change to the variation pattern which does not select the production with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may or may not be changed. In addition, the process (step Y255) of preparing a command notifying that the variation time of Toku-zu 1 is longer may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state is determined. The first variation mode determining means is capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above-described variation pattern performed in the game control device 100 is the second variation display game when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determination means. Is being executed, the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variable display game is referred to, and the information about the variation pattern is displayed without changing the determined variation time of the first variable display game. It constitutes a second variation mode determination means that can be re-determined.

Further, instead of changing the variation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed when determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). By performing the process (step Y254) of determining whether the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 variation start process (step Y225) in the special figure 2 normal process described above. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step Y261), and deviation information is set as the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting jackpot information or jackpot information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. 2 information setting process (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the variation pattern setting of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. (Step Y265).

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game. The process (step Y267) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

In addition, in the special figure 2 variation start process, processing for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and there is little chance that the special figure 2 variable display game will be forcibly ended with a miss result. However, as in the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result, the selection of the production with high expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1).

Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y275; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y276) of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is not a jackpot (step Y277; N), whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is a jackpot or not. A small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed.

If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y271. Then (step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the off information is saved in the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area to be prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y295; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y296) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

When the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is a jackpot or not. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

Then, when the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y291. Then (step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not the small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. In this case, the off information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit judging process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317) and the big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is judged whether or not there is a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If it is not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, it is first determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process ends. In addition, the deviation as the determination result indicates that the lottery for the small hit has been missed. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the decision is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

When the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit judgment value for special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if it is the decision on the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit upper limit decision value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y327), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 45, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process is shown. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 1 stop design evacuation area (step Y334). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forced to change.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired. It saves in special figure 1 special winning a prize opening information territory (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit design table is set (step Y341), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design save area (step Y342). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped specially 1 It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing 1 command is saved in the decoration special drawing 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), the special figure. The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 46, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process is shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved not in the special figure 2 stop symbol area but in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forced to change.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired. It saves in special figure 2 special winning a prize opening information territory (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and if it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small winning symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step Y371), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 2 stop design save area is saved (step Y372). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped specially 2 It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing 2 command is saved in the decoration special drawing 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y401). When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403). , Special figure 1 big hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a stop symbol pattern of big hit (step Y404).

If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If the special figure 1 big hit is not (step Y404; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern of the small hit (step Y405). If it is not the special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is not, the process proceeds to step Y407. In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 holding number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 holding number is added to the first half offset data. The values are added to convert the value (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y408). If it is not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; N), the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 deviation/small hit is set (step Y409), and the latter half offset data for special figure 1 length variation is set. It is set (step Y411). If the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 big hit is set (step Y410), and the second half offset data for special figure 1 length variation is set. (Step Y411).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable allocation information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable allocation information 2 area (step Y413). The setting process ends.

In other words, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state, in the case of a small hit, the variation pattern considering the special figure 1 hold number is determined for both the first half variation pattern and the latter half variation pattern, and in the case of a deviation. In the first half, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 reserved number only, and in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 reserved number. Further, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the specific game state, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 hold number.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y421). When the probability is high (step Y421; Y), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), and proceeds to step Y428.

On the other hand, when the probability is not high (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y424). If it is not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; N), the low-probability special figure 2 deviation/small hit first half offset data is set (step Y425), and the special figure 2 long variation offset second half offset data is set. It is set (step Y427). If the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 long fluctuation is set. (Step Y427).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429). The setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting processing (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is the variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the addresses of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 are acquired and prepared (step Y452). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 and prepared (step Y453).

Next, it deviates from the special figure 1, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged stop symbol pattern (step Y454). (Step Y455) and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), a distribution process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but if the result is off, the distribution value is 2 bytes in order to enable various effects.

Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reserved 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Then, the distribution processing (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reserved 1) of the special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).

After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is ended. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the latter half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the addresses of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 are acquired and prepared (step Y472). , And prepares by loading the variation pattern random number 2 from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (step Y473).

Next, a distribution process is performed (step Y474), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved (step Y475). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Then, the first half variation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y477). Next, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of Toku-zu 2 (step Y479). ).

After that, the distribution process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set. In the special figure 2 variable display game, since there are few types of the latter half variation, the variation pattern random number 1 is not used to select the latter half variation group, and only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are used to determine the variation pattern.

[2-byte sorting process]
FIG. 51 shows the 2-byte allocation process (step Y455) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution processing, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second-half variation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table, since distribution is not necessary, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

If the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the leading data of the latter half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variation group table is acquired (step Y503).

Next, the distribution value acquired in step Y373 is subtracted from the loaded random number value (variable pattern random number 1 value) to calculate a new random number value (step Y504), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is smaller than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503, and the subsequent processes are performed. To do. That is, in step Y503, after the distribution value defined next in the variable group selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random value in step Y505, and a new random A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. When it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte sorting process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 52 shows the allocation processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation pattern setting processing and special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table (based on the variation pattern random number 3 ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

In this distribution processing, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the prepared second half variation selection table (selection table) or first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”). Yes (step Y511). Here, the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table, like the latter half variation group table, store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half variation pattern or first half variation pattern, but it is necessary to sort. In the case of a selection table that does not have a distribution table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not the code without distribution (step Y512; N), the one distribution value initially specified in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

Next, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number values (the values of the variable pattern random number 2 and the variable pattern random number 3) to calculate a new random number value (step Y514), the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y515; N), the address is updated to the next distribution value (step Y516), and then the process proceeds to step Y513 and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step Y513, the distribution value defined next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, and then in step Y515 the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value. , And a new random number value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table. When it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step Y517), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 53 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the information of the special figure 1 is set. The random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (for the number of holding 1) is cleared (step Y552). When the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of special figure 2 are cleared (step Y553).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is out of alignment or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned additional value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 ms) excluding the time that can be measured is calculated as the additional value by using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times of measuring the prescribed time (here, 60,000 ms). It is supposed to be done.

Then, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. When the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long variation is a variation pattern that is set in the special figure 2 variation display game when the result is off or a small hit in the normal game state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, if the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is not started (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the routine proceeds to step Y564. If the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the fluctuation start information setting process is ended. When the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y570), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100, based on the first start-up memory stored in the first start-up storage means, the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) are displayed in the first change display game. It constitutes a first determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And a second determining means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining a fluctuation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

From the above, the first start winning hole 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball shot to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning hole 37 is shot to the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is placed at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and in the normal state (normal game state). The fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the second variable display game by the second determination means is more than the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the first variable display game by the first determination means. It will be long.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes second variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determining means, and the result and variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determining means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has passed the variation time, It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state which is a low probability state is a marginal or small hit, a long variation is set for which the variation time is very long. Information about time may not be transmitted to the performance control device 300, but a command indicating only a long variation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variable display based on the reception of the command of the long fluctuation. The change time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the change time ends, and the effect control device 300 stops the change display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the control load on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[Special figure 1 processing transition setting processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area ( For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Furthermore, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during fluctuation of special figure 1 (step Y607), and the transition setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation is ended.

The initial value set in the symbol number area during change of special figure 1 is 0, which allows the variable display to be started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 process change setting process during fluctuation]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area ( For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process is ended.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area is 0, which allows the variable display to be started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

In addition, when starting the variable display on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is assumed that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, or if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, at least the variable display is started from the state of lighting the segment. It may be done. Also, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on every time. In addition, the lighting mode when the fluctuation starts in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area to prepare (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y623).

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of out-of-range, 2000 ms in the case of large hit, and 136 ms in the case of small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 displaying process is being performed (step Y631). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 2 (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y631; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), commands are loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area to prepare (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). ). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and whether it is the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If it is not the special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is the big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step Y642). ), information is loaded from the special winning opening 1 special winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

After that, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645), and the special figure 1 The displayed process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area to prepare (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y653).

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of out-of-range, 2000 ms in the case of large hit, and 136 ms in the case of small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y659). If the special map 2 is out of alignment (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (step Y661). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the deviation result based on the special result of the special figure 2 variable display game having a special result. It should be noted that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 1 (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y661; N), the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area to prepare (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). ). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is the big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step Y672). ), information is loaded from the special winning opening 2 special winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675), and the special figure 2 The displayed process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step Y684). ), the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display transition process setting process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" relating to the special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step Y694). ), the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the fluctuation end of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 during-display process shift setting process 1, and hereinafter, information for setting the result of the deviation is set. First, the shift stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special prize 1 big winning a prize opening information territory is cleared (step Y707), the gap information is saved in the small hitting flag 1 territory (step Y708), the gap information is saved in the big hitting flag 1 territory (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), the stop figure number shifted to the special figure 1 stop symbol area is saved (step Y711), and the special figure 1 in-process shift setting processing 2 is ended. ..

[Special figure 2 display transition processing setting processing 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" relating to the special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the fluctuation end of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y724).

Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 1, and hereinafter, the information for setting the result of deviation is set. First, the shift stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, the special prize 2 big winning a prize opening information territory is cleared (step Y727), the gap information is saved in the small hitting flag 2 territory (step Y728), the gap information is saved in the big hitting flag 2 territory (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y730), the special symbol 2 stop symbol area is shifted and the stop symbol number is saved (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 2 is ended. ..

According to the processing of FIGS. 56 to 61 described above, when one special figure variation display game has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly discontinued and the first end control processing is performed, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process for forcibly stopping the special figure 1 variable display game as a result is performed.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game execution when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is being performed. When the second variation display game (execution control 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game performing the execution control. Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes the first variable display game execution control means when executing the second variable display game execution control. When the first variable display game under control has a special result, the second variable display game under execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped due to the outlier result, so that even if simultaneous variation is performed, no problem occurs. Can be

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
62 and 63 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y745), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y746).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the special figure 1 variation start processing is loaded (step Y747), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y748). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y749), and if it is not a big hit (step Y749; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. If it is a big hit (step Y749; Y), the big hit number counter is incremented by 1 (step Y755). This big hit number counter manages a specific period in which a high probability state can be set, and becomes 1 when the first special result is derived in the low probability state, and counts the number of times the first special result is derived in the specific period. It is a thing. Next, a test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is ON, a special symbol 1 signal is ON) related to the start of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step Y756).

Then, a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state.

Next, the decorative special drawing command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area to be prepared (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765). In the effect control device 300, when the fanfare command is received, an effect of instructing to aim at the gate 34 is performed.

Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768).

Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774), and the game number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Further, fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the processing during the display of special figure 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, if Toku-zu 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is off information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). Yes (step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y787).

If the probability is not high (step Y787; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.

After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y792). If it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. If it is not a small hit to open the upper special winning opening (step Y792; N), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower large winning opening is illegally won. Several areas are cleared (step Y795), the fraudulent monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying process is ended.

If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), the change in special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806). The normal process shift setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 displaying process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
64 and 65 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same process as the special figure 1 displaying process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y805), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y806).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the special figure 2 variation start processing is loaded (step Y807), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y808). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y809), and if it is not a big hit (step Y809; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. If it is a big hit (step Y809; Y), the big hit number counter is updated by +1 (step Y815), and a test signal (for example, a condition) related to the start of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 big hit). The signal during device operation is ON, and the signal per special symbol 2 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal variation notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state.

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area and prepared (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Then, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms, or 4 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). ..

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, a fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is off information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). Yes (step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y847).

If the probability is not high (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided.

On the other hand, if the probability is high (step Y847; Y), the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.

After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. If it is not a small hit to open the upper special winning opening (step Y852; N), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower special winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39), the lower large winning opening is illegally won. After clearing several areas (step Y855), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle processing shift setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying processing is ended.

If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), the change in special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866). The normal process shift setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated.

That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. Second special game generating means for forming a generating means and for generating a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device, based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Make up.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1]
66, details of the fanfare/interval interval process transition setting process (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying process and special figure 2 displaying process will be described. In this fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing, first, a signal relating to the start of a big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the jackpot 1 signal output in the jackpot or the jackpot is set to ON. Next, the signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the variation time shortening state of the special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game-state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is set. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

And the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery which saves the command output to the performance control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are entered.

Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), the signal relating to the right hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the right hit state is displayed in the game status display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y881).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area storing the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation number area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing is ended. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information regarding the abnormal change in special figure 2 is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 displaying process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, "7" relating to small hit fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, referring to the current game state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the specific game state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the non-specific game state. Then, the signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the jackpot 1 signal output in the jackpot or the jackpot is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special drawing status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special drawing 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing is completed. To do.

[Special figure 2 Small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 displaying process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, "7" related to small hit fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, referring to the current game state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the specific game state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the non-specific game state. Then, the signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the jackpot 1 signal output in the jackpot or the jackpot is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

Then, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid processing shift setting process ends. To do.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
FIG. 69 shows the fanfare/interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare/interval processing, it is first determined whether or not it is the first round (step Y940). If it is the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 34 (step Y941), and if there is no passage (step Y941; N), the fanfare/interval processing ends. To do.

If there is a passage (step Y941; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y942), and the round number upper limit value (16 or 10 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. ) Is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y943). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y944).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y945). When it is a big hit to open the special winning opening (step Y945; Y), the upper special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step Y946), and the fraud monitoring outside flag is set in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y947) and the process proceeds to step Y950. If it is not a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (step Y945; N), that is, if it is a big hit to open the lower special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y948), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y949), and the process proceeds to step Y950. At step Y950, the ON output data of the accessory continuously operating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y950), and the routine goes to step Y951.

On the other hand, if it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and special winning opening opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952). Perform effect command setting processing (step Y953).

Next, the big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit medium processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the process number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958). If it is the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y959). ), the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Yes (step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y963). It is possible to determine from the set special winning opening opening information whether or not the big winning opening is a big hit. If it is a big hit for opening the special winning opening (step Y963; Y), a process for setting processing during opening special winning opening 1 is performed (step Y964), and the processing during fanfare/interval ends. If it is not a big hit for opening the special winning opening (step Y963; N), the process for setting processing during opening of the special winning opening 2 is performed (step Y965), and the processing during fanfare/interval ends.

[Prize winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 70 shows the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (step Y964) in the above-described fanfare/interval process. In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y973), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Processing setting process 2 during opening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 71 shows the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 (step Y965) in the above-mentioned fanfare/interval process. In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, a signal related to the opening of the lower special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening/closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y983), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 72 shows the special winning opening opening process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this special winning opening opening process, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between the rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and the effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

Next, the remaining sphere processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 relating to the special winning opening remaining sphere processing is set as a processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011).

If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015).

After that, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening opening process is ended. In step Y1016, OFF data is set for both the upper special winning opening solenoid and the lower special winning opening solenoid, and a process of closing any large winning opening is performed.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
FIG. 73 shows the special winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y1041).

When the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal regarding the end of opening the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the processing number 3 for fanfare/interval processing is set (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the passage of the remaining ball processing time, and from the passage of the remaining ball processing time to the passage of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 on Special Figure 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, so the interval period is 2000 ms. Is executed.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), big hit end processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), and sets 6 for the special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process as the process number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step (Y1050), the special winning opening remaining ball processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area ( (Step Y1052), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing ends.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the final round to the passage of the remaining ball processing time, and further from the passage of the remaining ball processing time to the passage of the ending time. For example, in the case of the special winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 on Special Figure 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, so the ending period is 11000 ms, and the ending effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period. Is executed.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 74 shows the big hit ending process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information of the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), the information of the round number upper limit value area that stores the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

Then, the information of the round number upper limit value information area that stores the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the special winning opening opening information area that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the big hit middle control pointer area for setting the opening/closing mode of the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit ending process transition setting process is ended.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 big hit ending process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit end process, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special process 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

Next, the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag is stored. The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the area (step Y1107), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

The special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2 by performing this special figure 1 big hit end processing, but in the timer interruption processing, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is executed rather than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1109, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, the game control device 100, after the end of the special game state, the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby unit is provided to prevent the processing related to the start of the two-variable display game from being brought into an executable state.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot counter is the upper limit value (step Y1110). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special result is derived in the low probability state for the first time, and the high probability state is set after the special game state is ended until the number of times the first special result is derived reaches five times. Is configured. The big hit number counter counts the number of times the first special result is derived, and is 1 when the first special result is derived in the low probability state, and the upper limit value is 5.

When the value of the jackpot number counter is not the upper limit value (step Y1110; N), the process of setting the high probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state of shortening the variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. In addition, the big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and is made to continue. Next, the signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the shortened state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1114). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the high probability is always in the time saving state, and therefore, the numbers are set to the high probability without distinguishing them.

After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1115), the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116), and the probability information is stored in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery. The command (high probability) is saved (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot number counter is the upper limit value (step Y1110; Y), the process of setting the low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the jackpot counter is cleared (step Y1118), and a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the non-time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to OFF. Next, the signal related to the start of the low probability state and the non-time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to OFF.

Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1121). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122). Thereafter, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1123), and the low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1125), the leftward instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1126), and the special figure 1 jackpot end processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 2 big hit ending process (step Y145) in the special figure 2 game process described above. This special figure 2 big hit ending processing is the same processing except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. First, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure 2 normal process (step Y1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1132).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

Next, the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag is saved. The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the area (step Y1137), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit number counter is the upper limit value (step Y1139), and when the value of the big hit number counter is not the upper limit value (step Y1139; N), the process of setting the high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state of shortening the variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. In addition, the big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and is made to continue. Next, the signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1142). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number with a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the high probability is always in the time saving state, and therefore, the numbers are set to the high probability without distinguishing them.

After that, the right hitting number is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step Y1144), the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145), and the probability information is stored in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery. The command (high probability) is saved (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot counter is the upper limit value (step Y1139; Y), the process of setting the low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the jackpot counter is cleared (step Y1147), and a signal related to the start of the low probability state and the non-time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to OFF. Next, the signal related to the start of the low probability state and the non-time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to OFF.

Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1150). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151). After that, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1152), and the low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1154), the leftward instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1155), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, derivation of the 1st special result in the low probability state is made the first time, until the number of derivation times of the 1st special result becomes 5 times, after the end of special game state A specific game state, which is a high probability state, will be set. That is, the probability setting that allows the game control device 100 to set the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result of the special results after the special game state is set to the high probability state which is higher than the low probability state Make a means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a special result is higher than that in the normal state after the special game state ends.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting fanfare middle processing (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in this small hit fanfare medium processing, first, branching is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1201).

When the opening pattern is the small hit 1 (lower big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1) in step Y1201, the small win opening command for opening the lower big winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1202). ), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1203). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1204), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1205).

After that, the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (lower big winning opening opening/closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the small win opening command for opening the lower big winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared ( Step Y1209) and effect command setting processing are performed (step Y1210). Next, as the processing number, 8 for the processing during the small hit is set (step Y1211), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

After that, the small hit opening time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is the small hit 3 (upper prize opening/closing pattern 3) in step Y1201, the small win opening command for opening the upper prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared ( (Step Y1216), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1217). Next, 8 is set as the processing number for the processing during the small hit (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

Thereafter, the small hit opening time 3 (1200 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

When the opening pattern is the small hit 4 (upper prize opening/closing pattern 4) in step Y1201, the small win opening command for opening the upper prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared ( (Step Y1223), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1224). Then, 8 is set as the processing number for the small hitting processing (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

After that, the small hit opening time 4 (here 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing the processing corresponding to these types of small hits, the large winning hole count number area for counting the number of winnings in the large winning holes is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare medium processing is ended.

[Processing during small hits]
FIG. 78 shows the small hit mid-range processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hitting process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

When the open pattern is the small hit 1 (lower big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1) in step Y1243, 9 which is related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244), and the special figure 1 game processing number The processing number is saved in the area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hitting process is ended.

When the opening pattern is small hit 2 (lower big winning opening opening/closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, 9 related to small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1248), and the special figure 2 game processing number The processing number is saved in the area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (600 ms here) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hitting process is ended.

When the opening pattern is the small hit 3 or 4 (upper prize opening/closing pattern 3 or 4) in step Y1243, the small hit remaining ball processing 9 is set as the processing number (step Y1252), and the special figure The processing number is saved in the 2 game processing number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hitting process is ended.

In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, OFF data is set for both the upper special winning opening solenoid and the lower special winning opening solenoid, and the closing processing is performed for any of the special winning openings.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
FIG. 79 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining sphere processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 which is related to the special figure 1 small hit end process is set as the process number (step Y1272), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 which is related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1275), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

In both small hits of special figure 1 and special figure 2, in the setting of the small hit ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277), the current game state is referred to, and in the specific game state, the small hit ending 1200ms or 1400ms is set as the time, and 100ms is set as the small hit ending time when not in the specific game state. As a result, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms in the specific game state, and 700 ms or 900 ms in the non-specific game state.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the special winning opening count area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 80 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 which is related to the normal process of special figure 1 is set as a process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1305), and the round LED is used. The off number is saved in the pointer area (step Y1306), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1307). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1308), and if the probability is high (step Y1308; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1311. If the probability is not high (step Y1308; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1309). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. The number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1310), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1311). ), the special figure 1 small hit end processing ends. Here too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. The special display 2 variable display game is processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 81 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). After that, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y1338). When the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 82 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120, Y153) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device 51 and the special symbol 2 display device 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol fluctuation control process, first, it is checked whether the fluctuation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is changing (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up (step Y1405).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. Moreover, when the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the blink control timer initial value (100 ms in this case) is saved in the blink control timer area of the control target (step Y1406), and the symbol of the control target. The variable symbol number related to is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process ends.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is ended. As a result, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 83 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the above timer interrupt process. In this segment LED editing processing, a round display for displaying the memory display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50 and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39) Part 55, the first game state display unit 56 that informs the player of the left-handed (normal hit) and right-handed hits that are advantageous to the player, and the probability state (high-probability state or low-probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Settings related to the drive of the segment LEDs constituting the probability display unit 57 to be notified are performed.

In this segment LED editing processing, first, a special figure 1 reserved number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is acquired, and a segment is created. Save in the area (step X602). Next, the round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 55 is defined is set (step X603), the display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the probability display unit 57 is defined is set (step X605), the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 56 is defined is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), and the segment LED edit processing ends.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
FIG. 84 shows the magnet irregularity monitoring process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

In this magnet irregularity monitoring processing, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether it is in the detected state (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, it is determined whether the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 and the timer is up. The determination is made (step X613).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614) and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (step X615). Then, a command for magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. Yes (step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is set. If the specified magnet irregularity notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (step X620). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

If the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet irregularity monitoring process ends. In addition, when the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period ends, or the injustice notification occurs from the beginning. If it has not been performed, a command for ending the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X621). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), effect command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing ends. To do.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
FIG. 85 shows the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the board radio wave irregularity monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the irregularity notification are set.

In this board radio wave irregularity monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor 62 is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121a. It is determined whether or not it is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the board radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a board radio wave irregularity notification command is prepared (step X633), a board radio wave irregularity flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag becomes a value in the board radio wave irregularity flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, in the case of radio fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, if the board radio sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio fraud notification timer that defines the radio fraud notification time is updated by -1 if it is not 0 ( Step X635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is 0 (step X636).

If the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave injustice monitoring process ends. In addition, when the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period ends or the injustice notification occurs from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the board radio wave irregularity notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave irregularity release flag as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step X638), and prepare the board radio wave irregularity flag. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value in the fraud flag area (step X639).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing is ended. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step X640), effect command setting processing is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave irregularity monitoring is performed. The process ends.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 86 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the above timer interrupt process. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), the board radio fraud monitoring process (step X114), and the like are monitored. Based on the above, processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting it in an output buffer is performed.

In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and if a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12). ) It is determined whether a release error is occurring (step X702). When the main frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the OFF data of the security signal is set to the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step X704) and the process proceeds to step X707.

On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y) or when the body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door/frame opening signal The on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, the information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

Then, if the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the procedure goes to step X711. Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), is the occurrence of frame radio wave fraud, which is detection of an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12? Is determined (step X709).

When frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (step X709; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of switch connector is occurring (step X711). Then, when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

Then, the illegal magnet is occurring (step X713; Y), the board radio wave is occurring (step X714; Y), the special winning opening is illegal (step X715; Y), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y). ), at least one of the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X718). X719), and proceeds to Step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 have occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

Then, a starting opening 1 signal editing process for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X720) and a starting opening 2 signal editing processing for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning opening 37 (step X721). To do. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol fixed number signal editing process for setting information on the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process ends.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 87 shows the starting opening 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. In this starting port 1 signal editing processing, first, if the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the starting opening 1 signal output frequency is 0 (step X733).

Then, when the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is not 0 (step X733; N), the number of times of starting port 1 signal output is updated by -1 (step X734), and the starting port 1 signal output control timer region is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X735). The initial value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is the time obtained by adding the on-state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off-state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the starting port signal. (For example, 192 ms). After that, the ON data for turning on the starting port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the starting port 1 signal editing process ends. If the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output is 0 (step X733; Y), off data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), the start port 1 signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X736). The fact that the start-port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start-port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. If the start opening 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X736; N), the OFF data for turning off the starting opening 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X738), the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The starting port 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the above-described external information editing process performs the same process as the starting port 1 signal editing process for the starting port 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 88 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning the prize hole reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) to an external device. Processing.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output frequency is 0 (step X743).

If the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step X743; N), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the main prize ball signal in the ON state (for example, high level) and the time of the OFF state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Then, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step X743; Y), OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). (X748), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X746; N), save the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design decision number signal editing process]
FIG. 89 shows the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step X723) in the above-described external information editing process. The symbol fixed number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information relating to the number of times the special figure variable display game is executed.

In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency that is updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is 0. (Step X753).

Then, when the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal output to the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). This symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value is the time of the ON state (for example, high level) (256 ms here) and the OFF state (for example, low level) of the symbol determination frequency signal (here 300 ms) The time is (556 ms here). Since the gaming machine of this embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the on-state time is set to 256 ms and the off-state time is set to 300 ms.

After that, ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is ended. If the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0 (step X753; Y), save the OFF data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S753). (X758), the symbol fixed number signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756). It is to be noted that the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON section means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms). When the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step X756; N), the OFF data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol fixed number signal editing process is ended.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 90 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the hall/player setting mode process is performed for accepting operations such as the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and the change of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for performing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and editing of a drawing command. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (one frame is 1/30 seconds) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching in later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing has come (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.). C18), a board for performing a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor, the solenoid, and the reel 6 of the board production device 44, and controlling the presentation by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 91 shows the received command check processing in the above-mentioned main processing. In the received command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the command reception number is completed is completed. It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. Is configured. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to make a vacant space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207) and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 92 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of big hit commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), the symbol system command process (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the hold number command and error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination like a pattern command and a variable command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, a model designation command and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot system command (step C241; Y), the single-shot system command process (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol commands (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

In addition, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (hold) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which becomes the target of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 93 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is the information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

If the special figure type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variable command processing ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 16R jackpot symbols, 10R jackpot symbols, and small hit symbols. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, when a deviating variation command (variation pattern command) is received, as when receiving a symbol command of the 16R big hit symbol It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process is ended.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 94 shows the fluctuating effect setting process (step C365) in the above fluctuating command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (step C381). When the variation pattern type is the reachless variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code and the special figure type and the presentation mode at that time is set (step C382). In addition, since there is no reach variation, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and it is not necessary to specifically refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode and a probability variation mode. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 are different in each mode.

Next, by referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types to be reserved is acquired (step C383). Accordingly, in the case of a reach-less variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect that appears during each variation (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of reserves. After that, the first-half notice distribution group table is used to perform the lottery for the notice that appears during the first-half change (step C386).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice. The preliminary announcement lottery that appears in (Step C386).

Next, the notice production of the latter half fluctuation is drawn. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, variation display in a special result mode (special symbol combination) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. Is stopped and is variably displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is a variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the latter-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the latter-half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half notice distribution group table is used to change the latter half (during reach). A preliminary announcement lottery is conducted (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, an effect such as a variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game and main reach contents and a notice are decided. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol is also performed by referring to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variation display game, advance notice content, and game state (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (step C394). By these processes, the effect and advance notice in the decorative special figure variable display game set as described above can be executed. Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special map type is performed (step C395). In this process, the setting for reducing the decoration start memory display is made corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, etc., are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C397). Further, in addition to the variable display of the identification information, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special figure variable display game, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , The variation effect setting process ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 95 shows the single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether or not MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single-shot command processing is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether or not MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. The determination is made (step C263). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the single-shot system command processing is ended. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, the RAM initialization scenario data is set in order to perform an effect when the RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE outputs a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C is recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether or not they correspond (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power outage recovery is set in order to perform an effect upon power outage recovery.

When it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot system command process ends. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting demonstration.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269). When the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative starting memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the single-shot system command processing is ended. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). When the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing the process corresponding to the generated hold is performed (step C272), and the single-shot system command process ends. To do. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information on the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

If the MODE is not the special figure 2 hold at step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error/invalid (step C275). If the MODE is an error/illegal (step C275; Y), an error/illegal setting process is performed to perform a corresponding process such as an error notification (step C276), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the error/illegal setting process (step C276), a process of notifying when a command relating to an error or a fraud is received, a process of displaying a warning when a right-handing instruction notification command or a left-handing instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. ..

If MODE is not an error/illegal at step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for effecting effect mode switching is performed (step C278), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

In addition, in step C277, when MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is a symbol stop (step C279). Then, if MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot system command processing is ended. When MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In the determination as to whether it is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is the special figure that is currently changing.

Then, if the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the single-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special symbol is performed (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends the single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Big hit type command processing]
FIG. 96 shows the big hit system command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this big hit system command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the design information (stop design number or stop design pattern). If MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare production setting processing for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big hit or small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set to fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit system command processing ends.

If MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. If MODE is a round (step C404; Y), round effect setting processing for updating the number-of-rounds display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P-machine state is set to "in-round" (step C406). The big hit command processing ends.

If MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C408), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminates command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command relating to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

If MODE is ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect at the end of a big hit or a small hit is performed (step C411), and the P machine state is set to ending (step C411). C412), the big hit system command processing is ended. If MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening count command based on a winning of the special variable winning device.

When MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the big hit system command processing is ended. When MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to the winning of the special variation winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit system command process is ended.

Next, the effect of the game will be described. FIG. 97 shows the symbol array of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c. Each reel is provided with identification information of numbers 1 to 9 and identification information of a pink pattern. The symbol shown by a star is a blank symbol and is not a symbol constituting the result mode. FIG. 98 shows a decoration special result which is a special result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game executed on the variable display device 4. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, the decorative special results corresponding to the special result are arranged on any of the activated lines. When the result is out of alignment, the display is such that the decorative special result is not aligned on any of the effective lines.

The decoration special result is made to have a different correspondence with the special result depending on the special drawing type (special drawing 1 or special drawing 2). As shown in FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b), for the 16R jackpot, regardless of the type of special drawing, the decoration special result in which three odd-numbered same numbers are arranged corresponds to the decoration special result in which three peach patterns are arranged. For big hits as well, regardless of the type of special drawing, a special decoration result with three even numbers of the same number is displayed. In addition, with regard to the small hits 1 to 4, the special special result in which the numbers “123” are arranged in the special figure 1 corresponds, and the special special result in which three peach patterns are arranged in the special figure 2 corresponds.

The decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the variation display device 4 has different types of special figures depending on whether it is in a specific game state (high probability state), and corresponds to the main variation according to the game state. Display the decorative special figure variation display game. That is, the decorative special map 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed when not in the specific game state, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in the case of the specific game state Display the game. As a result, with respect to the small hit, the display of the result mode on the variable display device 4 becomes different depending on whether or not it is the specific game state.

In the decorative special figure variation display game in the specific game state, the variation mode is selected according to the special result, and the special result can be determined by the variation mode until the decoration special result is derived. In the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 94, a decorative special result to be used is selected depending on whether or not it is in the specific game state, and a variation mode according to the special result is selected for selection of a variation pattern in the specific game state. I am trying.

Although the correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result is different depending on the type of special drawing, it is not limited to this. For example, the correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result may be different depending on whether or not it is the specific game state. Further, although not used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a so-called latent state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, or a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can easily win. If a convertible variable prize device is installed in the start winning port, the normal variable prize device has a high ratio of being in an open state and it is easy to win the prize. The correspondence may be different. Further, the special result and the decoration special result may be associated differently based on the effect mode managed by the effect control device 300, or during a predetermined period (a predetermined number of games, a predetermined time) after the end of the special game state. Correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result may be different in an arbitrary period in such a game or an arbitrary period based on the time information of the RTC 338.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the effect on the variable display device 4 and the display device 41 in the low probability state which is not the specific game state. These controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100, and are mainly set in the variable effect setting process shown in FIG. 94.

In the low probability state, the variable display device 4 is adapted to display the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the main special figure 1 variable display game. Further, in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81 for displaying the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and then stopping the display. Further, a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is provided in the lower right part of the display area. Here, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping the display.

At the center of the display area, a storage display section 83 for displaying a decorative starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory is provided. The decorative starting memory display displayed here corresponds to the first starting memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the order of storage, and here it is indicated that there are four first starting memories. The decoration starting memory display at the left end is the decoration starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is consumed. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to each starting memory and the pre-read result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

At the center of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83, there is provided a running storage display unit 84 that displays information regarding starting storage corresponding to the currently-running special figure 1 variable display game. The decoration start memory display at the left end of the memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special-figure 1 variable display game, and the result and fluctuation pattern of the special-character 1 variable display game to be executed are displayed. Is indicated by its display mode.

When the first starting memory is exhausted and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 99(a), the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the first memory display section 83 is displayed as shown in FIG. 99(b). A display is made to flow into the section 84. Here, the result and variation pattern of the special figure variation display game are also suggested in the same manner as the look-ahead effect in the running memory display unit 84.

Then, in the variable display device 4, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory is started, and the variable display of each reel 6 is started. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 also starts the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, and the variable display of the identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

After that, first, the left reel 6a of the variable display device 4 is stopped as shown in FIG. 99(c), and then the right reel 6c of the variable display device 4 is stopped as shown in FIG. 99(d). Here, the same identification information is stopped on each of the line rising to the right and the line descending to the right, and the reach state is reached, and the reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may stop on the activated line and the reach state may not be reached. Thus, in the reach state, the first half variation is until the right reel 6c is temporarily stopped, and the second half variation is thereafter.

Then, when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 99(e), the middle reel 6b of the fluctuation display device 4 is stopped and all reels 6 are stopped, and the result is displayed. Here, it is shown that the decoration special result is not aligned on any effective line and the result is out of alignment. Also, in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81, the variable display of the identification information is completed in each of the left area, the middle area and the right area, and the result is stopped and displayed. Here too, the result of the failure is displayed. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are finished with the end of the stop time. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 99(f), the display of the running memory display portion 84 is erased, and the next special figure variation display game can be started.

If there is no start memory in the state of FIG. 99(f), the customer wait state is set. Further, if the result is the first special result (big hit) in the state of FIG. 99(f), it becomes the first special game state, and by passing the game ball to the gate 34, the round game of the first special game state is started. The Rukoto. If the result is the second special result (small hit) in the state of FIG. 99(f), the decoration special result of "123" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the variable display device 4 and the second special game state. Will be started.

FIG. 100 shows an example of effects on the variable display device 4 and the display device 41 in the specific game state (high probability state). In the high probability state, the variable display device 4 displays the decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the main figure special variable 2 variable display game. Further, a decoration special figure 1 variable display game display section 81 for displaying the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is provided in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 41, and a decoration special figure 2 variable display is displayed in the lower right part of the display area. A decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a game is provided. In the upper right part of the display area, there is provided a memory display section 83 for displaying a decorative starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory. The decorative starting memory display displayed here is a numerical display of the number of first starting memories.

In the lower center of the display area, there is provided a running memory display section 84 for displaying information on the starting memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure 2 variable display game. The result and variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game which is also executed by the during-execution storage display section 84 are suggested by its display mode. Further, in the upper center of the display area, an acquired number display section 85 for displaying the number of prize balls acquired in a predetermined period is provided. Here, the prize balls obtained by winning the special variation winning device in the small hit that occurs from the end of the special game state to the start of the next special game state in the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. The cumulative value of the number is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 100(a) is a state in which the special game state based on the small hit has ended. In this state, in response to the result of the small hit that generated the special game state, the variable display device 4 is in a state where the decorative special result in which the peach symbols are arranged in the middle line is stopped and displayed as the result mode, The decoration special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 is also in a state in which the result mode of "123" is stopped and displayed corresponding to the result of the small hit that generated the special game state.

From this state, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and along with this, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started. When the result of the special display 2 variable display game is a miss or a small hit, the variable display is started in which the reels 6 swing vertically as shown in FIG. 100(b). At this time, each reel 6 operates up and down so that the pink symbol of each reel 6 does not fall out of the range of the symbol display window 5 which is a display area. The execution mode of this decorative special figure variable display game is the first execution mode.

Then, when the variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 100(d), the variable display device 4 stops and displays the decorative special result in which the pink patterns are lined up on the activated line as the result mode. The decorative special figure variable display game in the variable display device 4 in the specific game state is a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the main special figure 2 variable display game, and the decorative special result corresponding to the small hit is pink. It is a result mode in which the symbols of are aligned. That is, when the result is a small hit, it is possible to recognize that the small hit occurs because the decorative special result is stopped and displayed after the variable display is performed in the first execution mode. Further, in the decorative special map 2 variable display game display portion 82, the result mode “123”, which is the result mode corresponding to only the small hit, is stopped and displayed.

When the result is out of alignment, as shown in FIG. 100(e), the variable display device 4 stops and displays the outlier result mode in which the pink symbols are not aligned on the activated line. Even when displaying the result mode of this deviation, the symbol display window in which the pink symbol of each reel 6 which constitutes the decorative special result of the small hit in the variable display device 2 variable display game in the variable display device 4 is the display area The result mode that does not deviate from the range of 5 is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the result mode of the deviation is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 100E, as long as the peach symbols are not arranged on the activated line. In addition, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 also displays the result mode of the deviation.

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game started from the state of FIG. 100(a) is off or a big hit, the variable display in which each reel 6 rotates in one direction as shown in FIG. 100(c). Is started. At this time, the pink symbol which constitutes the decorative special result of the small hit in the decorative special figure 2 variable display game on the variable display device 4 is out of the range of the symbol display window 5 which is the display area. The execution mode of this decorative special figure variable display game constitutes the second execution mode.

Then, when the variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed. If the result is off, as shown in FIG. 100(e), in the variable display device 4, the decoration special figure 2 in the variable display device 4 the pink of each reel 6 that constitutes the small special decoration result in the variable display game The symbols are not aligned on the effective line at a position that does not deviate from the range of the symbol display window 5 which is the display area, and the result mode of the deviation is stopped and displayed.

When the result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 100(f), the variable display device 4 stops and displays the result mode in which the symbols corresponding to the special result are lined up on the activated line. That is, when the result is a big hit, it is possible to recognize that it is a big hit because the decorative special result corresponding to the special result is stopped and displayed after the variable display is performed in the second execution mode. Here, it is a 16R jackpot and the decoration special result of "777" is stopped and displayed. However, the 16R jackpot is also associated with a decoration special result having the same peach pattern as the small hit, and this peach pattern is also aligned. The decoration special result may be stopped and displayed. Further, the result mode of "777", which is one of the result modes corresponding to only the big hit, is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display portion 82.

In this way, by making the variation mode different between the big hit and the small hit, the player can easily understand the type of the special result. In particular, in the specific game state, the variation time becomes short and the special figure variation display game is executed with a high frequency. Further, small hits frequently occur and the interval of big hits is short, so the frequency of special results becomes high. There is. In such a game state, the player can grasp the type of the special result derived from the time of the variable display, and have a room to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning device other than the decorative special variable display game. Therefore, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest of the specific game state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the same special special result (here, a special special result in which peach patterns are aligned) may be stopped and displayed for the big hit and the small hit, but it is possible to determine whether it is the big hit or the small hit depending on the variation mode. ..

Although the first execution mode and the second execution mode are shown as the execution modes of the variable display, other execution modes may be provided and assigned to the special result. For example, a plurality of execution modes may be assigned to one special result. In addition, the execution mode may be different between the 16R big hit and the 10R big hit. In addition, it is possible to provide an execution mode that can be commonly selected for the big hit and the small hit so that it is difficult to determine which of the hits. Further, not only in the specific game state, but also in another game state, a specific execution mode may be assigned to a specific special result.

Further, as the decoration special result in the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display section 81 and the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display section 82, the decoration special result shown in FIG. 98(a) is used regardless of the game state. The type of special result can be discriminated even in the specific game state, but the decorative special result of FIG. 98(b) may be used as in the variable display device 4.

In addition, whether the peach pattern forming the decoration special result of the small hit in the decoration special figure 2 variable display game in the variable display device 4 deviates from the range of the symbol display window 5 in the first execution mode and the second execution mode. However, other differences are also differences in execution modes. For example, in the first execution mode, the reel 6 operates in the forward and reverse directions, whereas in the second execution mode, the reel 6 operates only in the forward direction. Further, in the first execution mode, the reel 6 operates without making one revolution, whereas in the second execution mode, the reel 6 makes one revolution.

In addition to this, the operation mode of the reel 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. For example, both the first execution mode and the second execution mode enable the reels 6 to swing, and in the first execution mode all the reels 6 swing, whereas in the second execution mode, the reels 6 swing. It is also possible that only some reels 6 operate so as to swing and the other reels 6 rotate. Further, the operation directions of the reels 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. In the first execution mode, all reels 6 operate in the opposite direction, whereas the second execution mode. Then, all reels 6 may be operated in the forward direction. Further, some reels 6 may rotate in opposite directions so that the number of reels 6 operating in opposite directions may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode. Further, the light emission mode of the backlight of the reel 6 may be different between the first execution mode and the second execution mode.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the game effect is controlled in the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state advantageous to the player. The effect control means executes an ornamental game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed corresponding to the game and then the result is stopped and displayed, and the result of the game is a special result. In this case, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and one decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results. Therefore, the same decorative special result can be displayed for different special results, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when executing the decoration game in which the decoration special result corresponding to the plurality of special results can be stopped and displayed, the specific control selected as the execution mode of the decoration game is selected according to the type of the special result. This means that the mode can be set. Therefore, the interest that the type of the special result can be grasped from the execution mode is created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means, as the specific execution mode, performs variable display in a state in which all of the identification information forming the decoration special result corresponding to the plurality of special results is present in the display area, and the decoration special result is stopped and displayed. A first execution mode and a second execution mode in which a part or all of the identification information forming the decoration special result corresponding to the plurality of special results moves to the outside of the display area and the decoration special result is stopped and displayed. And, either of them will be selected according to the type of the specific special result. Therefore, the first execution mode and the second execution mode can be easily discriminated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the variable display device 4 for displaying the decorative game is provided, and the effect control means can change the decorative game displayed on the variable display device 4 according to the game state, and in a predetermined game state, one A decoration game in which the decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results is displayed, and a decoration game in which one decoration special result corresponds to one special result is displayed in a state other than the predetermined game state. Therefore, in a predetermined game state, the special result can be easily grasped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, an execution mode of the decorative special figure variation display game when a big hit occurs due to irregular variation will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the low probability state which is not the specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed as the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed as the irregular variation. The variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game that is irregular variation is very long, but in a low probability state, it is unlikely that a special result will be derived in the special figure 1 variation display game. Since the probability is low, a special result may be derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 which is the information to that effect is longer, and the effect control device 300 varies based on this information. A specific execution mode is set for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game executed on the display device 4.

FIG. 101 shows an example of the specific execution mode. The state shown in FIG. 101A is a state in which a new special figure 1 variable display game is started while the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a big hit in the low probability state, is being executed. The variation time of the new special figure 1 variable display game is shorter than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the information to that effect is transmitted from the game control device 100. Along with this, the effect control device 300 sets a specific execution mode for the new special figure 1 variable display game in the variable effect setting process shown in FIG. 94.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), in a specific execution mode, the backlight of each reel 6 is turned off, and variable display is performed such that each reel 6 swings up and down. In addition, the display device 41 displays “Exciting mode!” that indicates a specific execution mode. Also, the variable display is started in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 ends, and the result mode of the big hit is stopped and displayed. Along with this, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended with a deviation result, and the variation display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81 is ended and the deviation result mode is stopped and displayed. In addition, the variable display device 4 stops and displays the result mode of the deviation.

When the stop time for displaying the result is over, the special game state is started and the fanfare period starts. With the start of the fanfare period, the display device 41 displays a message prompting the player to hit the right side. Further, with the start of the fanfare period, the variable display device 4 performs a variable display in which each reel 6 is rotated as shown in FIG. 101D, and during the fanfare period, as shown in FIG. Special results will be stopped. After that, the round is started on condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 34 and the special variation winning device is opened.

With such a specific execution mode, it is possible to derive the special result of the irregular variation and execute the special game state without a feeling of strangeness. Further, since the results of both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be sequentially displayed on the variable display device 4, the player can check the respective results. In particular, an appropriate game progress can be performed in a game machine using a reel having a low degree of freedom in display.

In addition, the display of the results of the special figure 2 variable display game that is irregular variation is performed during the special game state, and during the stop time of the special figure variable display game, either the main variation or the irregular variation is the special result. However, the result of the main fluctuation is always displayed even if both are out of alignment.

In the high probability state which is the specific game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be irregular variation. Since the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variation, is short and the special result is derived with high frequency, it is unlikely that the special result will be derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. Is not set. Of course, a similar specific execution mode may be set when the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game is derived.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended with the result of deviation, the variable display device 4 changes its display with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. Is stopped and displayed in a result mode other than the decorative special result, and the special game state based on the small hit is performed as it is. In this case, the stop position of the reel 6 is the position when the stop command is received, and the reel 6 is stopped even when the symbol is not on the activated line.

Further, when the special execution mode is set when the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is shorter than the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is The specific execution mode may be started when it is shorter than the longest fluctuation time set when the variable display game in FIG. With this configuration, the period for executing the specific execution mode can be set to a fixed period.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is the special result, the starting winning hole is formed in the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state advantageous to the player. A first start-up winning opening 36, a second start-up winning opening 37 forming a start-up winning opening, and a first variable display game execution control means for executing a first changing display game based on winning of a game ball into the first start winning opening. (Game control device 100), a second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes a second variable display game based on the winning of a game ball into the second start winning opening, and controls the effect of the game. And a production control device (production control device 300) for performing a decoration game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information corresponding to the game are variably displayed and then the result is stopped and displayed. In the case of a result, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and the first variable display game execution control means and the second variable display game execution control means perform the first variable display game and the second variation display game. The display games can be executed at the same time, and when one of the variable display games has a special result while the other variable display game is being executed, one of the variable display games is forcibly ended with the outlier result. The effect control unit is configured to perform the forced stop process, and the effect control means sets the specific execution mode as the execution mode of the decorative game corresponding to the game in which the forced stop process is performed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the forced stop may occur due to the specific execution mode.

Further, the effect control means is configured to display a decorative game corresponding to one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, which is predetermined according to the game state, on the variable display device. When the game to be displayed as a game is forcibly stopped by the deviation result due to the forced stop processing, the deviation result is displayed on the variable display device, and the variable display device is operated in the subsequent special game state to activate the other one. This means that the special decoration result corresponding to the result of the game is displayed. Therefore, the results of both games can be shown to the player.

Next, an effect when a small hit occurs will be described. FIG. 102 shows a case where a small hit occurs in a low probability state which is not the specific game state. As shown in FIG. 102(a), when the variation time ends from the state where the special figure 1 variation display game in which a small hit occurs is being executed, the result is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 102(b). Here, "123", which is the decorative special result corresponding to the small hit, is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping line on the variable display device 4. Further, the decoration special result “123” corresponding to the small hit is also stopped and displayed on the decoration special map 1 variable display game display portion 81.

After that, the special game state based on the small hit is started, but the display of the in-execution storage display section 84 is erased as shown in FIG. 102(c) except for the stop time shown in FIG. 102(b). It remains displayed. Then, when the special gaming state ends, the next special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 102(d). In this way, in the low probability state, since no special effect is performed in the special game state based on the small hit, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period are set to the minimum necessary time and smooth as shown in FIG. It enables the progress of various games.

FIG. 103 shows a case where a small hit occurs in the high probability state which is the specific game state. As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the decoration special figure 2 variable display game which is a small hit, each reel 6 swings up and down so that the pink symbol does not fall out of the range of the symbol display window 5 which is the display area. A variable display is displayed that operates. After that, when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the variation display device 4 stops and displays the decorative special result in which the pink patterns are lined up on the activated line as the result mode. In addition, the decorative special map 2 variable display game display portion 82 stops and displays the result mode “123” which is the result mode corresponding to the small hit.

In the special game state based on the small hit, first, in the small hit fanfare period, as shown in FIG. 103(c), a promotion display 86 is displayed instead of the in-execution storage display section 84 for prompting the winning of the special variation winning device. Then, when the small hit fanfare period ends and the special variable winning device is opened, and the game ball wins the special variable winning device, as shown in FIGS. 103(d) and 103(e), the number of prize balls obtained is obtained. The value of the number display portion 87 is updated every winning. At this time, the numerical value is not updated in the acquired number display portion 85.

Thereafter, when the opening of the special variable winning device is completed and the small hit ending period is reached, a result display 88 showing the result of the number of prize balls obtained in the special game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 103(f). The value of the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is added to the acquired number display portion 85. When the small hit ending period ends and the special game state ends, the display of the in-execution memory display portion 84 is resumed, and the next special figure variation display game is ready to be executed.

Since the special effect is performed in the special game state based on the small hit in the high probability state as described above, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period are times sufficient to execute the effect as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the information of the number of prize balls, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state in which many prize balls can be obtained.

Next, a notification mode in the notification unit 72 having a function of notifying the number of times the special result is derived in the specific period and a function of notifying information about the number of prize balls from the end of the special game state to the time of deriving the next special result. Will be described.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the big hit (first special result) in the low-probability state is derived for the first time, and in the period until the number of big hits is derived five times, after the special game state ends, in the specific game state It is configured to be in a certain high probability state. In the high probability state, it is easy to derive the next big hit, and the frequency of small hits increases because the game progresses mainly on the special figure 2 variable display game. During the period from the derivation of the jackpot in this low probability state to the end of the special game state based on the derivation of the jackpot for the predetermined number of times, the special game state based on the jackpot and the high probability state alternately occur, and the player is A large number of prize balls can be easily obtained, which is an advantageous period for the player, and thus this period is set as an advantageous period.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the right part of the center case 40, there are provided a first notification part 72a, a second notification part 72b, a third notification part 72c, and a fourth notification part 72a as the notification part 72 including LEDs capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors. A notification unit 72d is provided. The first notifying unit 72a is given the number "1", the second notifying unit 72b is given the number "2", the third notifying unit 72c is given the number "3", and the fourth The number "4" is attached to the notification unit 72d. This number indicates the number of jackpots that occurred during the advantageous period, excluding the jackpots that were derived in the low-probability state that triggered the start of the advantageous period. That is, it shows the number of jackpots that occurred in the high probability state. Further, the notification section 72 is adapted to indicate the number of big hits that have occurred in the advantageous period, depending on the lighting state of the LED.

The number of jackpots derived during the advantageous period can be grasped by adding 1 to the number of the notification unit, and it can be said that the notification unit reports the number of derived jackpots during the advantageous period. Further, the remaining jackpot derivation number in the advantageous period can be grasped by subtracting 4 from the number of the notifying unit, and it can be said that the notifying unit informs the remaining jackpot derivation number in the advantageous period. Of course, a number may be attached to the notification unit so as to correspond to the number of times of jackpot derivation or the number of remaining derivations.

FIG. 104 shows an example of the notification mode in the notification unit 72. In the state of playing the game in the low probability state, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d, which form the notification unit 72, are in a turned-off state. Then, when the special result (first special result) of the big hit is derived in the low probability state and the special game state is started (t31), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, The fourth notification unit 72d starts blinking. The blinking state indicates that the big hit corresponding to the notification unit 72 has not yet occurred, and the state where the four notification units 72 are blinking means that the number of jackpots derived in the high probability state is 0. It shows that the remaining four big hits can be derived.

When the special game state based on the big hit generated in the low probability state ends (t32), the high probability state is set. In this high-probability state, the game progresses with the special figure 2 variation display game as the main variation and frequent small hits occur, so that the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. The period (t32 to t33) from the start of the high probability state to the occurrence of the next big hit is set as the first counting period, and the number of prize balls acquired in the first counting period is counted. The counted result is displayed on the acquired number display section 85 of the display device 41.

Then, when the first big hit in the high probability state which is the next big hit occurs (t33), the first notification unit 72a is turned on, and the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d. Remains blinking. This indicates that the number of jackpots derived in the high probability state is one. Further, the first notification unit 72a is in a state in which it is turned on with a light emission color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period (t32 to t33) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. That is, the first notification unit 72 is in a state of simultaneously reporting the notification of the number of jackpots derived in the high probability state and the counting result in the first counting period.

Five colors of white, blue, yellow, violet, and red are prepared in order from the one with the smallest counting result as an emission color for notifying the counting result. It should be noted that the iridescent emission that sequentially changes each color is used when the derivation of the special result is definitely notified in the effect of the special figure variation display game on the display device 41, and is used by the notification unit 72. Since there is a risk of misrecognition as if a notification of the derivation of the special result was given, it is not used as an emission color for notifying the counting result.

When the special game state based on the first big hit in the high probability state ends (t34), the high probability state is established. Then, the number of prize balls obtained in the second counting period is counted with the period (t34 to t35) from the start of the high probability state to the occurrence of the next big hit as the second counting period. Further, the display of the acquired number display section 85 is set to 0 at the start of the second counting period, and the counting result in the second counting period is displayed.

When the second big hit occurs in the high probability state which is the next big hit (t35), the first notification unit 72a and the second notification unit 72b are turned on, and the third notification unit 72c and the fourth notification unit 72d blink. It remains in the state. This shows that the number of jackpots derived in the high probability state is two. Further, the second notification unit 72b is in a state of being lit with a light emission color corresponding to the counting result in the second counting period (t34 to t35) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. The first notification unit 72a is maintained in a state of being lit with a luminescent color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period, that is, in the first notification unit 72a and the second notification unit 72b, the jackpot in the high probability state is derived. The notification of the number of times and the counting result in each counting period are simultaneously notified.

When the special game state based on the second big hit in the high probability state ends (t36), the high probability state is established. Then, the number of prize balls acquired in the third counting period is counted with the period (t36 to t37) from the start of the high probability state to the next big hit occurrence being the third counting period. The display of the acquired number display section 85 is set to 0 at the start of the third counting period, and the counting result in the third counting period is displayed.

When the third big hit occurs in the high probability state that is the next big hit (t37), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, and the third notification unit 72c are turned on, and the fourth notification unit 72d blinks. It remains in the state. This shows that the number of jackpots derived in the high probability state is three. In addition, the third notification unit 72c is in a state of being turned on with a light emission color corresponding to the counting result in the third counting period (t36 to t37) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. The state in which the first notification unit 72a is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period is maintained, and the state in the second notification unit 72b is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the second counting period. Is maintained. In other words, the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, and the third notification unit 72c are in a state of simultaneously reporting the notification of the number of jackpots derived in the high probability state and the counting result in each counting period.

When the special game state based on the third big hit in the high probability state ends (t38), the high probability state is established. Then, the number of prize balls obtained in the fourth counting period is counted with the period (t38 to t39) from the start of the high probability state to the occurrence of the next big hit as the fourth counting period. The display of the acquired number display section 85 is set to 0 at the start of the fourth counting period, and the counting result in the fourth counting period is displayed.

When the fourth big hit occurs in the high probability state which is the next big hit (t39), the first notification unit 72a, the second notification unit 72b, the third notification unit 72c, and the fourth notification unit 72d are turned on. This indicates that the number of jackpots derived in the high probability state is four. Further, the fourth notification unit 72d is in a state of being turned on with a light emission color corresponding to the counting result in the fourth counting period (t38 to t39) ended by the occurrence of the big hit. The state in which the first notification unit 72a is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the first counting period is maintained, and the state in the second notification unit 72b is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the second counting period. Is maintained, and the third notification unit 72c is maintained in a state in which it is lit in the emission color corresponding to the counting result in the third counting period. That is, in the 1st alerting|reporting part 72a, the 2nd alerting|reporting part 72b, the 3rd alerting|reporting part 72c, and the 4th alerting|reporting part 72d, the alerting|reporting of the jackpot derivation|leading-out frequency in a high probability state and the counting result in each counting period are alert|reported simultaneously. It will be in the state of doing.

When the special game state based on the fourth big hit in the high probability state ends (t40), the low probability state ends and the advantageous period ends. And the 1st alerting|reporting part 72a, the 2nd alerting|reporting part 72b, the 3rd alerting|reporting part 72c, and the 4th alerting|reporting part 72d are light-extinguished, and it becomes a display in a low probability state on the display apparatus 41.

In this way, by notifying the number of prize balls acquired during the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In particular, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the player's ball holding is increased even during the period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period, while the ball holding is reduced as in the conventional case. It has different playability than just waiting for the derivation of the next special result. For this reason, how many prize balls are acquired in a period until the next first special result is derived in the advantageous period is also an important item related to the profit of the player. By notifying the number of prize balls obtained during this period by the notifying unit 72, the amount of profit obtained by the player can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 105 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this count effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is an advantageous period (step C501). When it is not this advantageous period (step C501; N), the count effect setting process is ended. In this case, the game ball is won in the special variation winning device in the special game state based on the small hit generated in the low probability state, and no special effect is performed.

If it is the advantageous period (step C501; Y), the winning prize ball counter is updated by +15 (step C502), and the total acquisition number counter is updated by +15 (step C503). The winning prize ball counter counts the number of prize balls obtained by winning the special variable winning device during a predetermined period of the advantageous period. In addition, the total acquisition number counter counts the number of prize balls acquired by winning the special variable winning device during the advantageous period. Here, since 15 prize balls are generated by winning the special variable winning device, each counter is updated by +15.

After that, the display of the acquired number display section 85 of the display device 41 is updated (step C504), and the count effect setting process ends. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired in the high probability state is displayed on the acquired number display unit 85, but the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is displayed on the acquired number display unit 85 during the special game state. You may do it. Further, although the total acquisition number is not displayed, it may be displayed.

[Notification information setting process]
FIG. 106 shows the notification information setting process performed in the board effect setting process (step C20) in the main process described above. In this notification information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the advantageous period (t31 in FIG. 104) (step C511). When it is the start timing of the advantageous period (step C511; Y), the display of the notification unit 72 is started (step C512). As a result, blinking display of the notification unit 72 is started. Next, the acquired prize sphere counter area is cleared to 0 (step C513), the total acquisition number counter area is cleared to 0 (step C514), and the notification information setting process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not the start timing of the advantageous period (step C511; N), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the advantageous period (t40 in FIG. 104) (step C515). When it is the end timing of the advantageous period (step C515; Y), the display of the notification unit 72 ends (step C516). This turns off the notification unit 72. Next, the value of the winning prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C517). The number of prize balls acquired in the last special game state in the advantageous period is recorded in the acquired prize ball counter at this timing, and this value is saved as history information. Then, the value of the total acquisition number counter is saved as history information (step C518), and the notification information setting process ends. The number of prize balls from the start of the advantageous period is recorded in the total acquisition number counter, and this value is saved as history information.

On the other hand, when it is not the end timing of the advantageous period (step C515; N), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the first special game state. Here, the start timing of the special game state when the advantageous period is started is not included, and the timing of t33, t35, t37, and t39 in FIG. 104 corresponds.

When it is the start timing of the first special game state (step C519; Y), the light emission mode of the notification unit is selected and set from the value of the winning prize ball counter (step C520). The number of award balls acquired from the end of the previous special game state to the start of the current special game state is recorded in the award ball counter acquired at this timing, and based on this value, the corresponding notification unit 72 emits light. Select and set the mode. As a result, the corresponding notification unit 72 changes from the blinking state to the lighting state.

Next, the value of the winning prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C521). As a result, the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the previous special game state to the start of the current special game state is saved as history information. After that, the winning prize ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C522), and the notification information setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of the first special game state (step C519; N), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the first special game state (step C523). Here, the ending timing of the special game state when the advantageous period ends is not included, and the timings of t32, t34, t35, and t36 in FIG. 104 correspond. If it is not the end timing of the first special game state (step C523; N), the notification information setting process is ended.

If it is the end timing of the first special game state (step C523; Y), the value of the winning prize ball counter is saved as history information (step C524). As a result, the value of the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state which has ended this time is saved as history information. After that, the acquired prize ball counter area is cleared to 0 (step C525), and the notification information setting process ends.

In the special gaming state based on the fourth big hit in the high-probability state that will be performed at the end of the advantageous period, the result of counting the number of prize balls in each counting period in the advantageous period and the type of the jackpot in the advantageous period. , The result of the game during the advantageous period, such as the information on the type and number of small hits, the result of counting the number of prize balls in each special game state, the result of counting the number of prize balls in the entire advantageous period, etc., is displayed on the display device 41. You may do it. When informing the counting result of the number of prize balls in each special game state, or the counting result of the number of prize balls in the entire advantageous period, the prize ball obtained in the special game state performed at the end of the advantageous period In order to obtain the number information, the notification is performed after the remaining ball processing in the special game state is completed. Further, regarding the special game state performed at the end of the advantageous period for performing this notification, the ending time may be set longer than the other special game states. In the notification of these pieces of information, it is possible to use history information that stores the counting result in each counting period. Further, the history information may be referred to at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like.

Further, although the notification unit 72 is configured to notify the number of prize balls acquired by the emission color, the notification unit 72 may notify by the operation. For example, the amount of protrusion toward the center of the game area may be increased as the number of won prize balls is increased, or the rotation angle may be increased. Further, although the acquired number display unit 85 displays the counting result in each counting period, the counting result in each counting period in one advantageous period may be added up, or in the special game state in one advantageous period. The total number of acquisitions including the number of acquisitions may be displayed.

Further, although the number of prize balls due to winning in the special variation winning device is counted, the number of prize balls due to winning in other winning openings may be added up. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 the number of prize balls based on the winning of each winning opening. Further, the number of game balls consumed by the launch may be subtracted to count the net increase in the counting period. In this case, the number of shot balls is counted and subtracted from the number of won prize balls.

Further, one notifying unit 72 may be provided with two display units, one of which displays the counting result in the counting period and the other of which displays the derived type of the first special result. Further, the counting period may include the period of the special gaming state. For example, the first counting period is a period (t31 to t33) from the start of the special game state based on the first special result derived in the low probability state to the derivation of the next first special result, and the second counting period is the second counting period. The period from the end of one counting period to the derivation of the next first special result (t33 to t35) may be set similarly, the third counting period may be set to t35 to t37, and the fourth counting period may be set to t37 to t40. Of course, the division of the counting period can be set arbitrarily, and other divisions may be used.

From the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37), and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is played. In the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player, the effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game, and the game result becomes the first special result (big hit) of the special results. Probability setting means (game control device 100) for setting the probability to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state is provided. Derivation of the first special result is the first time, and during the period from the derivation of the first special result to the predetermined number of times of derivation of the first special result, the game is executed with a high probability state, The production control means notifies the number of times of derivation of the first special result or the remaining number of times until reaching a predetermined number, and from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state, a special number based on the first special result of a predetermined number It is possible to notify the information regarding the result of counting the number of prize balls in a predetermined period of the advantageous period which is a period until the gaming state ends. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Further, the effect control means can count the number of prize balls in the counting period which is a period from the end of the special game state in the advantageous period to the derivation of the next first special result, and a plurality of counting periods in one advantageous period. It is possible to inform each of the counting results in. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. In addition, the number of acquisitions other than the special game state in which the number of acquisitions is easily influenced by luck can be grasped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production control means displays the number of times of derivation of the first special result or the remaining number of times until reaching a predetermined number by using the notification unit 72 that corresponds one-to-one with each derivation of the first special result during the advantageous period. The information relating to the counting result of the number of prize balls in the counting period is displayed in the notifying unit 72 corresponding to the derivation of the first special result that triggers the end of the counting period. Therefore, the result of each counting period can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, a first start prize hole 36 that forms a start prize hole, a second start prize hole 37 that forms a start prize hole, and a first variable display game that is executed based on the winning of a game ball to the first start prize hole 1 variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes a second variable display game based on winning of a game ball into a second start winning opening And a specific game state generation means (game control device 100) for generating a specific game state in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state during the high probability state. , The second special game state is generated as the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is the second special result of the special results, and the second special display state in the second variable display game The probability that the special result will be derived is higher than the probability that the first special result will be derived, and the effect control means will count the number of prize balls generated in the second special game state. Becomes Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game during the advantageous period in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. In addition, the number of acquisitions other than the special game state in which the number of acquisitions is easily influenced by luck can be grasped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the effect produced by the game points will be described. The game points are given by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and it is suggested that the more the game points are, the higher the possibility that a advantageous state for the player such as derivation of a special result occurs. Has become. The game points can be given at any timing such as when a start memory is generated, when a special figure variation display game is started, when a reach state is generated, or when a specific effect is executed. Also, the game points can be accumulated over a plurality of special figure variable display games.

In the present embodiment, the game points are used to suggest the degree of expectation that is a high probability of a big hit, and the expectation degree is suggested by the game points at a predetermined notification timing in the target special figure variation display game. It is supposed to be done. FIG. 107(a) shows the expected degree suggested according to the value of the game points. When the game points are 20000 points or more, the occurrence of the reach state is notified, and when the game points are 30000 points or more, the occurrence of the SP reach state is notified. When the game points are 40,000 points or more, the big hit is definitely notified, and when the game points are 50,000 points or more, the 16R big hit is notified.

107(b) to 107(f) show an example of giving and using game points. As shown in FIG. 107(b), game points can be awarded at the start timing of the special figure variation display game. In this case, each display unit of the point notification unit 73 is sequentially turned on like a roulette with the start of the special figure variation display game, and the display unit corresponding to the points to be given is turned on. Here, it is shown that the points to be given are 100 points. Further, the given points are added to the cumulative value notification unit 74. Here, 100 points are added while the accumulated points are 0 points.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107(c), it is possible to give game points at the timing when the special figure variation display game is in the reach state. In this case, each display unit of the point notification unit 73 is sequentially turned on like a roulette with the occurrence of the reach state, and the display unit corresponding to the point to be given is turned on. Here, it is indicated that the points to be given are 10,000 points. Further, in the cumulative value notification unit 74, 10,000 points are added from the state where the cumulative points are 100 points to be 10,100 points.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107(d), it is possible to give game points at the timing when a new starting memory is generated. Here, as a result of the preliminary determination of the new starting memory that has occurred, it has been found that the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory causes a miss SP reach. Therefore, when determining the points to be awarded, the cumulative value of the points is determined to be less than 40,000 points. Here, the points to be given are 5000 points, and the accumulated value notifying section 74 adds 5000 points from the state where the accumulated points are 10100 points to be 15100 points. Further, in the decorative starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory in the memory display unit 83, the pre-reading notice effect for changing the display mode is performed.

After that, the points are given a plurality of times, and the predetermined notification timing is started in a state where the accumulated value is 37600 points as shown in FIG. 107(e). Along with this, as shown in FIG. 107(f), one light emitting unit of the expectation notification unit 75 is turned on corresponding to 10,000 points, and here, three light emitting units are turned on. As a result, it is notified that the SP reach will occur in the special figure variation display game being executed. Here, the fraction less than 10,000 points is erased, but it may be left. The control relating to the game points as described above is performed in the board effect setting process (step C20) in the main process shown in FIG.

The board effect device 44 may be operated according to the number of lights of the expectation notification section 75. Although the game points are added at the predetermined timing, they may be subtracted at the predetermined timing. Further, the special map variation display game subject to the advance notice by using the game points is not limited to the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory which is determined to be the special result or reach by the preliminary judgment, and it can be arbitrarily set. is there. For example, in the special figure variation display game, which is appropriately deviated so that the accumulated game points do not become too large, the game points may be consumed by making a notification. In the present embodiment, when the number of points exceeds 30,000, the occurrence of the reach is announced. Therefore, it is preferable that the game points are consumed before the number of points exceeds 30,000. Conversely, if the notification has not been made even after the number of points exceeds 30,000, the state in which the reach or the special result will occur even if the notification has not been made is in the state of being foretold.

Further, the cumulative value notification unit 74 may be used as the acquired number display unit 85. For example, the game points and the acquired number may be displayed in parallel. Further, the effect by the game points may not be performed in the specific game state, and the cumulative value notification unit 74 may be used as the acquired number display unit 85 in the specific game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, when one of the variable display games has a special result while the other variable display game is being executed, one of the variable display games is forcibly ended with the outlier result. Although the forced stop process is performed, one variable display game is suspended until the end of the special game state based on the other special result, and one variable display game that is suspended after the special game state is terminated is displayed. It may be restarted. In addition, depending on the type of the special result, it may be possible to select whether to forcibly end or interrupt the result. For example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in the other variable display game, one variable display game is forcibly ended with the outlier result, and the second special result in the other variable display game. When the (small hit) is derived, one of the variable display games may be interrupted.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result differs depending on the game state.

As shown in FIG. 108(a), the decoration special result in a state other than the specific game state is the same as in FIG. 98(a), but as shown in FIG. 108(b), the decoration special result in the specific game state is , The special special result in which three peach patterns are arranged corresponds to the 16R big hit, the 10R big hit, and the small hit, and the special special result composed of numbers does not appear.

In the decorative special figure variable display game in the specific game state, the decorative special result displayed is the same for any special result, but the variation mode is selected according to the special result. The special result can be discriminated by the variation mode until the result is derived. In the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 94, a decorative special result to be used is selected depending on whether or not it is in the specific game state, and a variation mode according to the special result is selected for selection of a variation pattern in the specific game state. I am trying.

The execution mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the variation display device 4 in the specific game state is as shown in FIG. 100. In the case where the result is a loss or a small hit, the first variation as shown in FIG. The variable display is performed in one execution mode, and the decorative special result in which peach symbols are lined up on the effective line of the variable display device 4 as shown in FIG. The result mode of the deviation as shown in e) is stopped and displayed. If the result is a loss or big hit, the variable display is performed in the second execution mode as shown in FIG. 100(c), and the loss result mode as shown in FIG. 100(e) is stopped and displayed. Or, in FIG. 100(f), the decorative special result in which peach symbols are lined up on the activated line of the variable display device 4 is stopped and displayed as the result mode.

In this way, the result mode in the variable display device 4 is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit, so that the player can easily understand the occurrence of the special game state. In particular, in the specific game state, the variation time becomes short and the special figure variation display game is executed with a high frequency. Further, small hits frequently occur and the interval of big hits is short, so the frequency of special results becomes high. There is. In such a game state, the player only needs to be aware that the special variable winning device is opened when the decorative special result of the peach pattern is stopped and displayed. Since there is a room to pay attention to the opening of the variable winning device, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest of the specific game state advantageous to the player.

Further, although a common decorative special result is used for each special result, the effective lines arranged may be different depending on the special result. For example, in the case of 16R big hit, the peach symbols may be arranged in the middle line, in the case of 10R big hit, the peach symbols may be arranged in the upper line, and in the case of small hit, the peach symbols may be arranged in the lower line. Further, the execution modes may be different between the 16R big hit and the 10R big hit so that they can be distinguished.

Also, regarding the decoration special result in the decoration special map 1 variable display game display section 81 and the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display section 82, the decoration special result shown in FIG. By using the result, it is possible to determine the type of the special result even in the specific game state, but the decorative special result of FIG. 108(b) may be used as in the variable display device 4.

From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the game effect is controlled in the gaming machine 10 that generates the special game state advantageous to the player. The effect control means executes an ornamental game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed corresponding to the game and then the result is stopped and displayed, and the result of the game is a special result. In such a case, the decoration special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game, and the correspondence between the special result and the decoration special result can be made different according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a decorative game having a different taste according to the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means, in a predetermined game state, one decoration special result corresponds to one special result, and in a predetermined game state, one decoration special result corresponds to a plurality of special results. This is what I did. Therefore, the same decorative special result can be displayed for different special results, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in a predetermined game state, the special result can be easily grasped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when the effect control means stops and displays the decoration special result corresponding to the plurality of special results as the result of the decoration game in the predetermined game state, the effect control means may execute the decoration game according to the type of the special result. This means that the selected specific execution mode can be set. Therefore, the interest that the type of the special result can be grasped from the execution mode is created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines using the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls.

In addition, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Amusement machine 36 1st prize winning opening (starting winning prize)
37 Second Winning Prize (Starting Winner)
38 1st special variable prize device (special variable prize device)
39 Second special variable prize device (special variable prize device)
100 game control device (probability setting means, first variation display game execution control means, second variation display game execution control means, specific game state generation means)
300 production control device (production control means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production control means for controlling the production of the game,
Probability setting means for setting the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result of the special results to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state. ,
The probability setting means,
In the period from the derivation of the first special result to the derivation frequency of the first special result reaching a predetermined number of times, the high probability is set as the first time in the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state. To run the game in the state,
The effect control means,
Based on the first special result of the predetermined number of times from the derivation of the first special result in the low probability state, while notifying the number of times of derivation of the first special result or the remaining number of times until reaching the predetermined number of times. It is possible to count the number of prize balls in the counting period which is the period from the end of the special game state to the derivation of the next first special result in the advantageous period which is the period until the special game state ends, A gaming machine, which is capable of informing each of information regarding the result of counting the number of prize balls in the plurality of counting periods in the advantageous period . The effect control means,
It is configured to display the number of times of derivation of the first special result or the remaining number of times until reaching the predetermined number of times using a notification unit that corresponds one-to-one with each time of derivation of the first special result during the advantageous period. ,
Information on the counting result of counting prize counts in the period, according to claim 1, wherein the displaying in the notification unit corresponding to the derivation of the that triggers the end of the counting period the first special Result Amusement machine.

Images